Home

Tabor Electronics Ltd.

1. User Manual Table 3 2 Front Panel Menus continued Soft TOP 2 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes B Run Mode A Continuous Provides access to continuous mode parameters B Triggered Provides access to triggered mode parameters C Gated Provides access to gated mode parameters D Burst Provides access to burst mode parameters C Utility Provides access to 5062 Factory Reset Remote Setup Multi Instrument synchronization and System parameters D Outputs Provides access to output parameters sync properties and start phase offset between channels Enabling the Outputs 3 8 MENU For safety reasons main outputs default setting is OFF The outputs can be turned on and off using either the hot keys or from the Output Menu Observe Figure 3 3 and disable or enable the main outputs using the following procedure The same procedure can be used for enabling and disabling the SYNC output The numbers on Figure 3 3 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 2 QA SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 Output OFF e Filter NONE Divider 1 BASE MODE SYNC OUT While not editing any parameter select the channel you want to turn on using the PROGRAM CH1 or CH2 keys Press ON OFF OUTPUT or SYNC to toggle main and sync output on and off Position Width ARM OFF PRQGRAM ON Q F CHI cH OUTPUT SYNC OC GIG GIG CIGR oom ME
2. Program Files Fluke ArbExplorer Mot Tem51 wa0 Figure 4 20 The Waveform Screen Notice on the left top and on the right top there are two triangles pointing to the center of the screen These are the anchors The anchors are used as the start and end pointers where your waveform will be created For example if you want to create a sine waveform between point 100 and point 500 you place the left anchor at point 100 and the right at point 500 and then generate the sine from the built in library There are two ways to control anchor placements 1 Click and hold your mouse cursor on the left anchor triangle and then drag the curtain to the left position Do the same for the right anchor Notice the X and Y coordinates at the top of the waveform screen and how they change to correspond to your anchor placement ArbConnection 4 The FM Composer 2 You can also place your anchors in a more precise manner from the waveform library by programming the start and end points for the waveform An example of anchor placement using the sine dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 Finally when you are done creating and editing your waveform you can save your work to a directory of your choice The name at the title will show you the name you selected for storing your waveform and its path The FM Composer looks and feels almost like the waveform composer except there is a major difference in what it does If you look at the opening scre
3. Figure 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform Segments Channel 1 The Channel 1 Waveform command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 Channel 2 The Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 waveform If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 2 the waveform screen will show a dc level at vertical point 0 4 35 5061 5062 User Manual 4 36 Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen The Wave command has a library of 8 waveforms Sine Sawtooth Square Sinc Gaussian Exponent Pulse and Noise It also lets you create waveforms using the Equation Editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave command Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 18 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 18 will appear You can now start programming parameters that are available in this box
4. generator entirely with an external clock source Either way this is a major twist in the 5062 basic operation because if for any reason you leave one or both source options on external and do not apply the necessary signal to the input the operation of the generator will be impeded without visual references that something is wrong The SCLK and the 10MHz reference source menu were placed in the System menu as shown in Figure 3 15 Change these settings only if you are absolutely sure that another reference source is available at the appropriate inputs The SCLK input is located on the rear panel Use this input to replace the internal sample clock generator The external sample clock input accepts ECL level signals terminated to 2V into 500 The 10MHz reference input is also located on the rear panel It accepts TTL level signals only Note that the 5062 internal reference is accurate to 1ppm The display and modify the SCLK or the 10MHz clock source press TOP then Utility and scroll down to the System option PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 cm outeur src mmm Oe mm gru 2 SerialNumber 0000666 Software Version 1 00 Yersion Date 27 Feb 2005 09 05 Calibration Date Not calibrated Installed Memory 1M Pts per channel 0 ttings Clock Source EE Level EA 10 MHz EXT a a MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 BREAK
5. ARM COFF The index numbers in the following point to the numbered arrows in Figure 1 6 1 2 Power Switch Toggles 5062 power ON and OFF Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 5062 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves control back from remote to front panel buttons Enter Man Trig Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters Pressing Enter selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the 506 1 5062 User Manual Rear Panel Connectors 10 11 12 buttons for other operations 2 When the 5062 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 5062 Cursor UP Down Left and Right Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scrol
6. Once the device is installed on the PC board the device is adequately protected and normal handling may resume The Model 5062 should be cleaned as often as operating conditions require To clean the instrument use the following procedure 1 Thoroughly clean the inside and outside of the instrument 2 When cleaning inaccessible areas remove dust with low pressure compressed air or a vacuum cleaner 3 Use alcohol applied with a cleaning brush to remove accumulation of dirt or grease from connector contacts and component terminals 4 Clean the exterior of the instrument and the front panel with a mild detergent mixed with water applying the solution with a soft lint free cloth Maintenance and Performance Checks Repair and Replacement Repair and Repair and replacement of electrical and mechanical parts must be accomplished with great care Printed circuit boards can become Replacement warped cracked or burnt from excessive heat or mechanical stress The following repair techniques are suggested to avoid inadvertent destruction or degradation of parts and assemblies 1 Use a 60 40 solder and temperature controlled 35 40 watt pencil type soldering iron on the circuit board The tip of the iron should be clean and properly tinned for best heat transfer to the solder joint A higher wattage soldering iron may separate the circuit from the base material 2 Keep the soldering iron in contact with the PC board for a mini
7. STATEe OFF ON MODE MASTer SLAVe PHASe OF FSet 0 0 1M 4 point increments OUTPut STATe OFF ON Fil Ter LPASs NONE 12M 25M ALL SYNC STATe OFF ON SOURce BIT LCOMplete POSition POINt 0 0 1M 4 point increments WIDTh 4 4 100000 4 point increments SOURce APPLy FREQ AMPL OFFS SINusoid FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS TRlangle FREQ AMPL OFFS PHAS SQUare FREQ AMPL OFFS DCYC PULSe FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL WIDT LEAD TRA RAMP FREQ AMPL OFFS DEL LEAD TRA SINC FREQ AMPL OFFS NCYC GAUSsian FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP EXPonential FREQ AMPL OFFS EXP DC DC_AMPL USER SEGM SCLK AMPL OFFS 5 8 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes FREQuency ECW 1e6 100e 6 25e6 MINimum MAXimum RASTer 1e7 100e 3 50e6 MINimum MAXimum SOURce INTernal EXTernal DIVider 1 1 65535 Integers only ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal PHASe OFFSet 0 0 1M 1 point increments VOLTage LEVel AMPLitude 5 000 10E 3 10 00 MINimum MAXimum OFFSet 0 4 5 4 5 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER SEQuence SHAP
8. Start Point Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 0 End Point Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end points The example below shows five sine cycles Amplitude 14 bit of vertical define 16 384 incremental steps The Amplitude parameter defines how many of these steps are used for generating the sine The example is showing sine waveform with maximum peak to peak amplitude Any number below the maximum will generate an attenuated sine Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start The example shows start phase of 90 Power The example shows sine cubed Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 ArbConnection 4 The Wave Composer ra Wave Composer gt Ch Program Files Fluke ArbExplorer Mot TemS1 wall File Edit View Wave Download About Sine Wave Anchor Start pts 0 End pts 499 Waveform Amplituc Max fas WE Min ES Wave Properties Cycles f Start Ph
9. VOLT AMPL lt amplitude gt Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values e FIXed USER and SEQuence They have short and long form command keywords Upper and lowercase letters can be mixed Query responses always return the short form in all uppercase letters The following command uses discrete parameters SOUR FUNC MODE FIXed USER SEQuence Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false The generator accepts OFF or 0 for a false condition The generator accepts ON or 1 for a true condition The instrument always returns 0 or 1 when a boolean setting is queried The following command uses a boolean parameter OUTP FILT OFF ON The same command can also be written as follows OUTP FILT 0 1 Arbitrary Block Parameters Binary Block Parameters SCPI Syntax and Styles Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Arbitrary block parameters are used for loading waveforms into the generator s memory Depending on which option is installed the Model 5062 can accept binary blocks up to 1M bytes The following command uses an arbitrary block parameter that is loaded as binary data TRAC DATA 564000 lt binary_block gt Binary block parameters are used for loading segment and sequence tables into the generator s memory Information on the binary block parameters is given later in t
10. ES cH1 Modulation f Type Sweep Linear Type Logarithmic E a ee Big Start Sample Clk e BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC MOD TYPE BIT 1 RUN CONT POSITION 8 777 PROGRAM ON OFF CHI C H2 OUTPUT SYNC 2 3 MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG 7 EN ETA 4 Figure 3 26 Sweep Parameters Sweep Type Defines the steps of which the sample clock increments or decrements from start to stop frequencies A choice is provided between linear and logarithmic steps If you select linear sweep the frequency range is divided to 1000 linear increments and the sample clock steps through these frequency increments within a time interval which is set by the sweep time parameter Likewise using the logarithmic sweep type the frequency span between the start and stop frequencies is divided by 1000 logarithmic steps Direction Defines the sweep direction UP sets sweep direction from start frequency to stop frequency DOWN reverses the sweep direction so the output sweeps from stop frequency to start frequency Using the Instrument 3 Generating Modulated Waveforms Start Sample Clk This is the frequency of the sample clock as displayed in the standard waveform screens Note that SCLK value is shown in gray and will automatically change when you set up frequency of the standard waveform There is no direct access to SCLK setting when you program standard waveform frequency The SINE OUT connector at the rear panel
11. SEQuence ADVance SOURce Response and default The 5062 will return the EXT or INT depending on the present single sequence advance source setting Default value is INT SEQuence DEFine lt step_ gt lt segment_ gt lt _repeat gt lt mode gt Purpose This command will define sequence steps and their associated advance mode lt step_ gt will define the link number lt segment_ gt will select the segment for the above link Oo Oo e lt repeat gt will define how many times the selected segment will loop e lt mode gt will assign the mixed mode bits for this sequence step 0 programs normal advance 1 programs trigger advance Step with a 0 bit assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats continuously and only a valid trigger signal will advance this step to the next step Note that the lt mode gt parameter has no affect when the sequence advance mode is set to SING To understand better the way the lt mode gt switch affects a sequence consider the following sequence setting SEQ DEF 1 1 1 0 Step 1 segment 1 no loops mode 0 SEQ DEF 2 2 1 1 Step 2 segment 2 no loops mode 1 SEQ DEF 3 3 10 1 Step 3 segment 3 10 loops mode 1 SEQ DEF 4 4 1 0 Step 4 segment 4 no loops mode 0 After selecting the sequence mode the generator will generat
12. VOLTage 5 VOLTage OFFSet 2 Both of the above parameters are legal and within the specified limits however the generator is unable to generate such an amplitude and offset combination Bit 4 Execution Error This bit is generated if the parameter following the command is outside of the legal input range of the generator Bit 5 Command Error This bit indicates the generator received a command that was a syntax error or a command that the device does not implement Bit 6 User Request This event bit indicates that one of a set of local controls had been activated This event bit occurs regardless of the remote or local state of the device Bit 7 Power On This bit indicates that the device s power source was cycled since the last time the register was read 5 63 5061 5062 User Manual Standard Event Status Enable Register ESE Error Messages 5 64 The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows one or more events in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in the ESB summary message bit The Standard Event Status Enable Register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Standard Event Status Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue an ESB summary message bit by altering the contents of the ESE Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is read with the ESE Common query The response to this query is a number t
13. lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 APPLy USER Response The 5062 will return lt seg gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Default values are 1 10e6 5 0 PHASe OFFSet lt phase_offs gt Purpose This command programs the start phase offset between channels 1 and 2 in units of waveform points Phase offset resolution when using this command is 1 point e lt phase_offs gt sets the phase offset between the channels Phase offset is in waveform points Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt phase_offs gt Oto1M 5 20 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem PHASe OFFSet Response and default The 5062 will return the present phase offset value Default value is 0 FM OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will turn the FM function on and off e ONor1 will set the FM on e OFF or 0 will set the FM off Parameter type Boolean FM Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the FM is on or 0 if the FM is off Default is 0 FM DATA lt header gt lt binary_block gt Purpose This command will download FM modulating waveform data in binary download Using this command Arbitrary FM waveform table data is loaded to the 5062 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message FM DATA 3100 lt binary_block gt This command causes t
14. 3 55 Chapter 4 ArbConnection Title Page Wiats in This GMA DION anat ctas 4 3 Introduction to Abt onnechon e erena nene aeaee s aa a aein i o ae 4 3 deM leie Eeler an a ea id 4 3 Quitting ADC o o 4 4 For the New and Advanced Leer 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 TAS Open o uri is 4 5 ArbConnection Features nneenennneenneeeneenneennrnnnennninnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnannnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn enen 4 6 Th Gontrol Panels vs Ad A A AS A ea 4 6 The GEI MS 4 8 The Standard Waveforms Panel 4 10 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel AEN ENEE 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table 4 13 Using the Waveform Studio ET 4 15 cds E 4 20 The Modulation Panel 4 22 EM ee Eer 4 22 ESA ane Ne coh UM NRK A O A Res Ae ee eh Re eh te 4 23 The Modulation Panel 2 Taie NENNEN NEEN de Ed dE dE EEN Eeer 4 24 EE 4 24 OVS EE 4 25 date Elle PA EE 4 26 Th Command Ge te TEE 4 29 The Elan 4 30 ThE GOMMANAS EE 4 30 The Kee e EE 4 37 TMG WAVE AMOS E Lino 4 37 The FM COMpoSer AA eebe deer 4 39 The Commands bar 4 39 5061 5062 User Manual Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor 4 44 WV FIRING Me E te 4 46 Ge genee EE 4 46 Elle sie Wis ile EE 4 47 eelere EE 4 48 Combining Ee d EE 4 53 TGP UISSAG OMMPO SEL ee cad 4 55 The Pulse Composer Commands bar ENNEN 4 55 The Pulse Composer Toolbar AEN 4 60 A a a e i a e aaa 4 60 Setting the Pulse Editor Options viii 4 62 Using the Pulse GING 2 oA A ee A a ee at
15. End pts 1023 Min ER ft Auto _Detauit_ Equation Amplitude p Bemave Store Browse Operands st amp sin 10 omg p p f 0 1 e OK 4 44 Figure 4 23 The Equation Editor Dialog Box There are four sub group parameters in the equation editor plus control buttons and equation field These parts are described below Anchor The anchors define start and end point of which the equation will be generated By default the anchors are placed at the start and the end of the horizontal time scale however the equation can be limited to a specific time scale by moving the anchor points from their default locations Start defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point End defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point Waveform Amplitude The vertical axis of the Wave Composer represents 14 bits of vertical resolution That means that the equation is computed resolved and generated with 1 32 768 increments and accuracy The Waveform Amplitude fields in the Equation Editor are used in two cases 1 when the amp parameter is used in the equation or 2 if the Level Adjuster is set to Auto Information on these two operations is given later ArbConnection 4 M
16. Int Trigger Setting Counter Reading Freq Pass Fail 2MHz 2MHz 2kHz 100kHz 100kHz 100Hz 1kHz 1kHz 1Hz 1Hz 6 14 1Hz 1mHz Maintenance and Performance Checks Sequence Operation Sequence Operation Automatic Advance Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function TOTB Measurement 2 Connect the counter channel B to the 5062 output 3 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK 50MS s Waveform Sequence Run Mode Triggered Amplitude 2V Output On 4 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segments 1to5 Wavelength 100 points Waveform 1 cycle square 5 Using ArbConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 100 000 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 100 000 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 100 000 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 100 000 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 100 000 Test Procedure 1 From ArbConnection press manual trigger and observe that counter reading is 500 000 counts Reset counter and repeat the test a few times Every time the counter reading should be 500 000 counts exactly Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to channel 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 5061 5062 User Manual Step Advance E
17. NENNEN 4 62 4 35 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design EEN 4 62 4 36 Selecting Pulse Editor Options isos nata 4 63 4 37 Usingihe Pulse Edo toi ie 4 65 4 38 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Exvample cnn cnn nc nn nnannnccns 4 68 4 39 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Exvample AEN 4 69 4 40 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Exvample AEN 4 70 4 41 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Exvample AEN 4 71 4 42 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Exvample AEN 4 72 4 43 The Pulse Editor Download Summary ui ld 4 73 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Fomat A 5 48 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation ccc eeesceneeeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeeees 5 49 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation cceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeneeeeeeeee 5 49 5 4 0x1 F59 Data Point Representation cocaina 5 50 A terrere ee 5 61 6 1 Software Version Screen rada 6 30 6 2 The Tee ee le ER EE 6 31 6 3 The Firmware Update Dialog Box coconnoninonccccnnnnnnnncnnnnnccnnnennnnnnnnnncccrnnnn nr 6 32 xi List of Figures continued 6 4 Firmware update Path DEE 6 33 xii Chapter 1 Getting Started Title Page What s in This GA Pie oe q en ees eerste et ace ee Keene 1 3 ON 1 3 3062 Feature Highlights oia a eee 1 3 ArbConnection Feature Highlights AAA 1 4 RE ere E 1 7 Salely Considera iiss eebe ee geb 1 9 S pplied ACCESS 1 9 DSC ICA OIG art dE eege 1 9 Functional DESCAPUON ua 1 9 Front Panel GOMIECIONS cc ia
18. SCLK input and 9 pin DSUB connector labeled Master Slave Optional consult factory at the time of purchase Rear panel SMB ECL into 500 terminated to 2V Rear panel SMB ECL 50Q terminated to 2V 4ns Rear panel 9 pin DSUB Rear panel BNC 10kQ 5 TTL 20ns Positive or negative going edge A 7 5061 5062 User Manual 10 MHz Reference Input Connector Impedance Threshold Level Duty Cycle AM Input Modulation Input Impedance Max Input Voltage Sensitivity Source Modulation Range Bandwidth GENERAL GPIB Information GPIB Revision SCPI Revision Logical Address Settings DMA Ethernet Connector Physical Layer Baud Rate Protocol USB Connector Specifications Protocol Front Panel Display Front Panel Indicator LED s Output On SYNC On Power Requirements Mains Input Range Maximum Total Module Power EMC Certification A 8 Rear panel BNC 10kQ 5 TTL 50 5 Rear panel BNC 1MQ 5 12V OV to 5V 5Vp p produce 100 modulation External 0 to 100 DC to 500kHz IEEE 488 2 1993 0 1 31 configured via front panel programming Downloads arbitrary waveform data arbitrary FM waveform data and sequence table data DMA support is required by the controller Rear panel RJ 45 female Twisted pair 10 100Base T 10 100 Mbit sec with auto negotiation SCPI commands over TCP IP IP address programmed through USB port Type A receptacle Version 1 0 version 2 0 SCPI co
19. TRIGger MODE SLOPe MARKer 2 2 2 VOLTage OFFSet SINusoid PHASe 2 TRIangle PHASe SQUare PULSe DELay WIDTh 2 DCYCle 7 2 2 TRANsition 7 RAMP DELay TRAiling 7 2 TRANsition TRAiling 7 GING NCYCle GAUSsian DE A2 EXPonent 7 EXPonential EXPonent AM OFF ON 0 1 Purpose Remote Programming Reference UP DONW LINear LOGarithmic CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed POSitive NEGative lt mark_sclk gt lt amp1l gt MINimum MAXimum lt offs gt lt phase gt lt phase gt lt duty_cycle gt lt delay gt lt pulse_width gt lt rise gt lt fall gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt fall gt N_cycles gt lt exp gt lt exp gt lt _amplitude gt This command turns the AM function on and off ON or 1 will set the AM on OFF or 0 will set the AM off Parameter type Boolean AM Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the AM is on or 0 if the AM is off Default is 0 APPLy SINusoid lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Purpose SOURce Subsystem 5 UP LINear CONTinuous POSitive 32e6 100e 3 50e6 5 10e 3 10 0 4 5 4 5 0 0 360 0 0 360 50 1 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 10 0 99 OW WO VO 0 0 99 9 60 0 99 9 30 0 99 9 10 4 100 20 10 200 20 100 100 100 100 100 This command is a high l
20. automatically change their couple state to Active ON and from this moment onwards all outputs will be synchronized If you want to remove slave units from couple mode all you have to do is change the Couple State on the master unit to Inactive OFF After you have synchronized all of your instruments you can further adjust the phase offset between the instruments Select the Start Position field and program the parameter to the required phase offset While modifying the edge offset bear in mind that both channels are shifted simultaneously from the adjacent channel Also note that the offset has 4 points resolution so expect to have increments of sample clock period x 4 3 53 5061 5062 User Manual 3 54 Di Note Due to cable connections and depending on the length of the cables you are using it is possible that you ll notice some phase delays between the master and slave units This is perfectly normal If you are using 1 meter cables you should expect about 2 ns delay between master and slave Additional delays will accumulate as you add slave units You can minimize the delay effect by using shorter cables where practical however it is impossible to eliminate this delay entirely One way to compensate for inter instrument delays is using different cable length at the output connectors You can also use the edge offset parameter to compensate for larger delays Using the Instrument Synchronizing Multiple Instruments
21. lt duty_cycle gt 0 to 99 in units of percent 5 32 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem SQUare DCYCle Response and default The 5062 will return the present duty cycle value Default value is 50 PULSe DELay lt delay gt Purpose This command programs delay of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt delay gt sets the delay parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt delay gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe DELay Response and default The 5062 will return the present delay value Default value is 10 PULSe WIDTh lt pulse_width gt Purpose This command programs pulse high portion of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt pulse_width gt sets the high time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt pulse_width gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe WIDTh Response and default The 5062 will return the present width value Default value is 10 PULSe TRANsition lt rise gt Purpose This command programs pulse transition from low to high of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt rise gt sets the rise time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt rise gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent 5 33 5061 5062 User Manual PULSe TRANsition Response and default The 5062 will return the present rise time value Default value is
22. 10 PULSe TRANsition TRAiling lt fall gt Purpose This command programs pulse transition from high to low of the standard pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt fall gt sets the fall time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent PULSe TRANsition TRAiling Response and default The 5062 will return the present fall time value Default value is 10 RAMP DELay lt delay gt Purpose This command programs delay of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt delay gt sets the delay parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt delay gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent RAMP DELay Response and default The 5062 will return the present delay value Default value is 0 RAMP TRANsition lt rise gt Purpose This command programs ramp transition from low to high of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt rise gt sets the rise time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt rise gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent 5 34 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem RAMP TRANsition Response and default The 5062 will return the present rise time value Default value is 60 RAMP TRANSsition TRAiling lt fall gt Purpose This command programs ramp transition from high to low of the standard ramp waveform This command has no affect on
23. 2 different sample clock settings are required for each channel the sample clock can be divided by an integer number before it is applied to the channel 2 circuits The sample clock rate is programmed in units of S s samples per second and will affect the instrument only when it is programmed to output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms The SCLK parameter has no effect on standard waveforms To access the required parameter click on the button until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading The Sequence Advance group provides control over advance modes for the sequence generator Advance options are Auto Stepped Single and Mixed Refer to the 5062 manual to find out more when and how to use these advance modes You should be careful while selecting modes because it is possible to cause ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels settings conflict for example if you select the Single option before you modified the run mode to Triggered The Advance Source programs from where the sequence will receive its advance stimuli If you select the Ext option you must apply a trigger source to the trigger input On the other hand selecting Int will facilitate the internal trigge
24. 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail Sweep Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Sampling Rate 50MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope 6 19 5061 5062 User Manual Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 5062 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode Sweep ON Stop Sample Clock 10Ms s Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify Sweep operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramp Down Period ims Max A 1MHz Min A 312 5kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Move 5062 sweep marker position to 21MS s and verify marker position at the middle of the ramp 3 Change oscilloscope time base to 1us and verify marker width 2us Test Results Pass Fail 4 Reverse between Start and Stop frequencies and verify oscilloscope reading as before except the ramp is up Test Results Pass Fail 5 Change sweep step to logarithmic and verify oscilloscope exponential up waveform Test Results Pass Fail 6 Remove the cabl
25. Appendix A The built in filters are switched in after the DAC circuit and are used for reducing the noise harmonics and spurious signals above the cutoff frequency More than 1 filter can be applied at any time the effects being additive Applying Filters The built in filters are available for the user in standard arbitrary and sequenced modes The only function where the Model 5062 does not allow external control is when standard sinusoidal waveform is selected lay Note The default output function of the generator is the sine waveform The instrument is using filters to generate this waveform therefore the state of the filters can not be changed until another output function is selected A setting conflict error will occur if one attempts to change the filter state before changing to another output function 3 21 5061 5062 User Manual If you do not plan on using the filters make sure that you leave the selection NONE This will eliminate confusing setting conflicts Modification of the filter state and range is done from the Outputs menu To access this menu select the Outputs screen as shown in Figure 3 3 and modify the parameters as shown in Figure 3 14 In cases where synchronization to other instruments in a system is Selecting the needed you have two options Use an external clock source for the SCLK Source and 10MhHz reference clock or replace the internal sample clock Reference 3 22 CS CJ CJ CJ C a
26. Carrier Sample Clk soft key and the value to 10MS s Press Enter to lock in the new value 4 Apply your FSK control signal to the trigger input If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate FSK modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 10kHz and shifted frequency of 25kHz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel 3 43 5061 5062 User Manual Sweep 3 44 Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 10MHz Shifted frequency is 25MHz In sweep modulation the 5062 sweeps from start frequency set by the Sample Clk parameter to stop frequency set by Stop Sample Clk parameter Both the sweep start and the sweep stop frequencies control directly the sample clock generator at the rear panel sine output and indirectly the front panel outputs Sweep modulation is also available from the front panel outputs except the frequency must be computed from the start sample clock and the number of points that generate the start output waveform When you select sweep modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 24 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification be ama SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062
27. Download Summary Mode of Operation Memory Menagement Waveforms mode Arbitrary Populated segment s 1 Memory usage pts 1600 Instrument Settings Amplitude v 8 000 Offset DI 1 000 Sample clock S s 20e3 Select from the menu View Options E Check this box if you do not wish to show it again Figure 4 43 The Pulse Editor Download Summary Interpreting the Download Summary 4 72 It is very important for you to understand that when you download a pulse waveform from the pulse composer parameters and mode of operation may change settings on your generator The download summary shows what will change and will let you reject the new settings if you do not agree to the changes Once you press the Accept button the waveform will be downloaded to the generator and the modes and parameters updated as shown in the dialog box If you are already familiar with the changes and do not care to see the download summary every time you download a pulse waveform you can check the box and it will not be shown on your next download You can restore this summary from the View gt gt Download Summary command Mode of Operation This describes the new setting of the operating mode This field could display one of two options Arbitrary or sequenced Pay attention to the note that says Select from the menu View gt gt Options Since we checked the Force Pulse Train to Single Segment see
28. Hop FSK is the default function To change to Ramped press the FSK Type soft key and with the arrow down key select the Ramped option Press Enter to lock in the modified parameter Hop Sample Clk Defines the shifted frequency value The 5062 will hop to the shifted frequency when commanded to do so Note that the instrument changes the frequencies coherently that is after the shift command is accepted the generator completes the waveform to its last point or phase and only then the next frequency is kicking in This way you can be sure that discontinuities in the output waveforms do not occur While using the FSK IN as hop control the instrument will shift on positive going transitions only Note that the FSK input is level sensitive so although the frequency shifts on transitions the output remains at the shift frequency as long as the level remains true The output will remain at carrier frequency as long as the FSK input remains TTL low false and at shifted frequency as long as the output remains TTL high true 3 41 5061 5062 User Manual Example 1 FSK Using Standard Waveforms 3 42 Carrier Sample Clk This is the frequency of the sample clock as displayed in the standard waveform screens Note that SCLK value is shown in gray and will automatically change when you set up frequency of the standard waveform There is no direct access to SCLK setting when you program standard waveform frequency The SINE OUT
29. MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC SEQ TYPE BIT 11 BREAKPOINT 1 emm gt RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE a Ea Cl Coy fy Wey A son son Figure 3 20 Editing the Sequence Table Selecting Sequence As was explained above the 5062 steps through an index of links Advance Modes It may loop a few times on a designated link and eventually after the last link the process repeats itself Stepping from link to link through the sequence table is done automatically by the instrument However there are applications requiring control when and how the link is stepped The 5062 has a number of sequence advance options Auto Stepped Single and Mixed These advance modes are described in the following Automatic specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously and automatically through the links to the end of the sequence table and then repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 and AUTO mode is used the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Of course each link segment can be programmed with its associated loop repeat number AUTO is the default sequence advance mode Note to use this mode the 5062 must be in continuous operating mode Stepped Using this advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next link only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 5062 generates the first s
30. MSS bit is not part of the IEEE STD 488 1 status byte and will not be sent in response to a serial poll However the RQS bit if set will be sent in response to a serial poll Bit 7 Decimal value 128 Not used always set to 0 Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries pendent Error User Request Command Error Query Error Standard Event Status Register ESR D Execution Error D Device De Request Control el Operation Complete Power On Queue Not Empty Logical OR Standard Event Status Register 76 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESE lt value gt Output Queue Service q read by Serial Poll Request B 0 Status Byte Register Generation g read by STB Logical OR Service Request Enable Register Gelee Aale SRE lt value gt SRE Figure 5 5 SCPI Status Registers 5 61 5061 5062 User Manual Reading the Status Byte Register Clearing the Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 62 The Status Byte summary register can be read with the STB common query The STB common query causes the generator to send the contents of the Status Byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status summary message as a single lt NR1 Numeric Response Message gt element The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register The STB common query does not alter the status byte Removing the reasons
31. Offset As specified in Table 6 5 Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Offset Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 5 6 8 Maintenance and Performance Checks Recommended Test Equipment Table 6 5 Offset Accuracy DMM Reading 5062 Setting Error Limits 400mV 4mV 4 000V 40mV Square wave Equipment Oscilloscope Characteristics Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 500 feedthrough at the oscilloscope input Setup As required for the test 1 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input 2 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1MHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform Square wave Characteristics tests on both channels using Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Square wave Characteristics Tests DMM Reading 5062 Setting Error Limits Rise Fall Time Over undershoot 6 9 5061 5062 User Manual Sine Wave Characteristics Sine Wave Distortion Equipment Distortion Analyzer ArbConnection Preparation 1 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 outputs to the distortion analyzer input Use 50Q feedthrough termination at the distortion analyzer input 2 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK As required by the test Waveform Arbitrary Amplitude 5V Output On 3 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength As required by the test Waveform Sine wave Test
32. Response and default The 5062 will return the present exponent value Default value is 20 DC lt _amplitude gt Purpose This command programs the amplitude of the standard DC waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt _amplitude gt sets the dc level as percentage of the programmed amplitude setting Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt _amplitude gt 100 to 100 in units of percent DC Response and default The 5062 will return the present dc value Default value is 100 5 36 Remote Programming Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut This subsystem controls the characteristics of the output It controls filter type and filter cutoff frequency It is also used to control the Subsystem sync output source and position Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit OUTPut OFF ON 0 1 OFF FILTer NONE 12M 25M ALL NONE SYNC OFF ON 0 1 OFF SOURce BIT LCOMplete BIT POSition lt position gt 0 0 1M WIDTh lt width gt 4 4 100000 OUTPut OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will turn the 5062 output on and off e ON or 1 will set the output on e OFF or 0 will set the output off Parameter type Discrete OUTPut Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the output is on or 0
33. SRE2 Not used SRE4 Not used SRE8 Not used SRE16 Service request on MAV SRE32 Service request on ESB summary bit SRE128 Not used Standard Event Status Register ESR Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries The Standard Event Status Register reports status for special applications The 8 bits of the ESR have been defined by the IEEE STD 488 2 as specific conditions which can be monitored and reported back to the user upon request The Standard Event Status Register is destructively read with the ESR common query The Standard Event Status Register is cleared with a CLS common command with a power on and when read by ESR The arrangement of the various bits within the register is firm and is required by all GPIB instruments that implement the IEEE STD 488 2 Description of the various bits is given in the following Bit 0 Operation Complete Generated in response to the OPC command It indicates that the device has completed all selected and pending operations and is ready for a new command Bit 1 Request Control This bit operation is disabled on the Model 5062 Bit 2 Query Error This bit indicates that an attempt is being made to read data from the output queue when no output is either present or pending Bit 3 Device Dependent Error This bit is set when an error in a device function occurs For example the following command will cause a DDE error
34. Save Waveform As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current FM Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved make sure to Save your work before you use this command 4 41 5061 5062 User Manual 4 42 Wave Commands The Wave commands let you create waveforms on the screen The Wave command has a library of 6 waveforms Sine Triangle Square Exponent Pulse and Noise lt also lets you create waveforms using an Equation editor Information how to create waveforms using the Wave commands is given below Creating Waveforms From the Built in Library You can create any waveform from the built in library using the Wave command Clicking on one of the Wave options will open a dialog box An example of the Sine waveform dialog box is shown in Figure 4 25 This dialog box is representative of the rest of the waveforms so other waveforms will not be described Creating Sine Waveforms Use the following procedure to create sine waveforms from the built in library Click on Wave then sine the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 22 will appear You can now start programming p
35. To reset the Model 5062 to factory defaults use the Factory Reset option in the Utility menu Recommended test equipment for troubleshooting calibration and performance checking is listed below Test instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required characteristics Table 6 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Model No Manufacturer Oscilloscope with jitter LT342 LeCroy package Distortion Analyzer 6900B Krohn Hite Digital Multimeter 2000 Keithley Freq Counter 6020 2 4 Tabor Electronics Spectrum Analyzer E4411 HP Pulse Generator with 8500 Tabor Electronics manual trigger Performance Check Procedures 6 6 Use the following procedures to check the Model 5062 against the specifications A complete set of specifications is listed in Appendix A The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for the test what the specifications for the tested function are and what acceptable limits for the test are If the instrument fails to perform within the specified limits the instrument must be calibrated or tested to find the source of the problem Maintenance and Performance Checks Recommended Test Equipment Frequency Accuracy Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Measurement function Freq A Termination 500 DC coupled 2 Connect the 5062 Channel 1 output to the counter input channel A 3 Configure the 5062
36. Triggered waveform 1kHz TTL 50 duty cycle Gated Waveform Burst 106 counts Single shot TTL 20 ns width 10e6 waveforms triggered Internal Trigger One cycle every 1ms____ Trigger Slope Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 500 feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External 6 12 Maintenance and Performance Checks Trigger Operation 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform TTL Output 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 5062 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Triggered Output On Test Procedure 7 Toggle 5062 trigger slope from positive to negative visa versa 1 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 5062 transitions are synchronized with the slope of the trigger Test Results Pass Fail Trigger Phase Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50Q feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test Trigger Source External 2 Connect 5062
37. a a o RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE cd ED Lu q f a f I a f b A A son son Figure 1 1 The Model 5062 e Four powerful tools in one software package Complete instrument control Waveform pulse and FM composers e Detailed virtual front panels control all 5062 functions and modes e Wave composer generates edits and downloads complex waveforms e FM wave composer generates and downloads complex modulating signals e Easy on screen generation of complex pulses using the pulse composer e Equation editor generates waveforms from equations e SCPI command and response editor simulates ATE operation e Translates waveform coordinates from ASCII and other formats e Simplifies generation of complex sequences Various screens of the ArbConnection program are shown in Figures 1 2 through 1 5 Getting Started 1 ArbConnection Feature Highlights Na R Anchor 1023 je Points Figure 1 3 AroConnection The Wave Composer 1 5 5061 5062 User Manual 5 FM Wave Composer gt C Program Files Tabor Electronics WayeCAD 3 2 MotiFmDeLwim loj xj File Edit View Wave Download About Oe OB S SC ZMH Me Sal vm peen 100000 Marker tst fo 15 z L Anchor 0 m Anchor Start pts End pts 999 m Peak Deviation Max fi 100000 Min Tam r Wave Properties Cycles 1 Start Phase fo Power 1 Figure 1 4 ArbConnection The FM Wave Composer E puls
38. a choice of continuous triggered and gated sweep Unlike the main trigger function the run modes for the sweep function operate in continuous mode For example if you place the instrument in triggered sweep the instrument will idle on the sweep start frequency and execute one sweep cycle when triggered Refer to the appropriate section in this manual to learn more about triggered sweep The Slope buttons let you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 5062 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal The Utility panel as shown in Figure 4 12 is invoked by pressing the UTIL button The Utility panel provides access to general instrument references that are not directly related to waveform generation Also available in this panel are some system commands such as Reset Instrument and CLS Clear Error Queue The Reset Instrument button is needed in places where you get stuck with instrument programming and want to start from a fresh and know state The default parameters are described in the programming section of this manual There are five groups in the Utility panel Multi Instrument Control for synchronizing multiple instruments to one master instrument Inter Channel Offset for controlling phase offset between channels Filter for controlling the filter state at the output
39. an example of a 5 step sequence of which the first waveform is made of segment 2 which will loop 15 times segment 4 looping 2 times segment 1 looping 7 times segment 2 once and segment 3 looping 4 times The Adv bits on links 2 and 5 are set to 1 and therefore external triggers are required for the sequencer to step through these links Y HINT The 5062 has two separate sequence generators one for each channel If the 5062 is programmed to continuous run mode make sure both channels have the same sequence length for inter channel synchronization For triggered run mode each channel can be programmed for a unique sequence length The control buttons on the left of the Sequence Table have the same functionality as for the Segment Table 4 19 5061 5062 User Manual The Trigger Panel 4 20 Dhar ee Phase pts i ngger Parameters Trigger Parameters Use the Append key to add a step at the end of the sequence list Use the Insert key to insert a step at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a step at the cursor position Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the sequence Table from the screen but click on the Save key if you want just to save your work before you close the dialog box The Download key has double action it will download the sequence table to the instrument and will save the contents of your table so the n
40. and will allow modification within the legal range of the displayed parameter If you reach the end of the range the dial will have no further effect on the display If you do not want to use the dial you can still change the display reading by using the TL or Y keys or simply type the required number using the standard keyboard features ei NOTE After you change the displayed readout the 5062 will be updated with the new parameter only after you press the Execute button Digital Display The display is used for displaying and reading various 5062 parameters just as you would use it on your instrument 4 7 5061 5062 User Manual The Main Panel The Main Panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is the first panel you see after invoking ArbComnection Notice how buttons and LED s are grouped this is done specifically so that common parameters are placed in functional groups The Main Panel groups allow from left to right adjustment of amplitude and offset selection of waveform mode selection of run mode and control over SYNC and Main output parameters Controls where applicable are provided for each channel separately 4 8 Parameters Figure 4 3 The Main Panel If you are connected properly to a PC and ArbConnection has detected your instrument then every time you press a button you are getting an immediate action on the 5062 lt is different if you are changing parameters on the display Doing this you ll have to
41. as other devices on your network if your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 Table 2 1 shows examples of valid and invalid IP addresses for a network using subnet mask 255 255 255 0 All valid IP addresses contain the same first three numbers The IP addresses in this table are for example purposes only If you are setting up your own network you probably do not have a gateway so you should set these values to 0 0 0 0 Table 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address Comment 123 234 45 213 Valid The first three numbers match the previous IP address The fourth number must be a unique number in the range of 1 to 254 123 202 45 214 Invalid Second number does not match the previous IP addresses The first three numbers must match on all IP addresses with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 123 234 45 0 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 0 123 234 45 255 Invalid The first three numbers are valid but the fourth number cannot be 255 2 16 Configuring the Instrument Selecting a Remote interface y TIP To find out the network settings for your computer perform the following steps e For Windows 98 Me 2000 XP 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type IPCONFIG 3 Press lt Enter gt If you need more information you can run ipconfig with the all option by typing IPCONFIG all at the DOS prompt This shows you all of the settings for the compu
42. command can convert ASCII CSV comma delimited text PRN space delimited text and 0 LeCroy binary format The Open dialog box in Figure 4 16 shows the various file extensions that can be opened into the Wave Composer environment The file that is opened is automatically converted to wav format and can later be saved as a standard 4 31 5061 5062 User Manual ArbConnection file A a Look in ArbExplorer y e EE PS Mot File name Wave_1 Files of type Binary wav y Cancel Binary way ASCII space delimited asc Comma delimited csw LeCroy format 0 LeCroy format tre Space delimited prm Comma delimited txt Figure 4 16 The Open Waveform Dialog Box Save Waveform The Save Waveform Ctrl S command will store your active waveform in your 5062 directory as a binary file with an wav extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save Waveform As Use the Save Waveform As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Waveform Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current W
43. connectors Reference Source for controlling the reference source for the internal clocks that are used for generating the waveforms and System that has some initialization buttons that reset internal buffers Description of the various controls on the Utility panel is given below ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels System Figure 4 12 The Utility Panel Multi Instrument Control The Multi Instrument Control group has three buttons Set Configuration Activate and Deactivate The Activate and Deactivate toggle the synchronization function on and off and are done from the master instrument only The configuration of the master and slave units is done from the Set Configuration dialog box that is invoked after you press the Set Configuration button To configure master slave operation press the Set Configuration button The dialog box as shown in Figure 4 13 will display Multi Instrument Synchronization Panel Available Instruments Group to Synchronize State Model _ Device Address Phase Offset Apply Activate Deactivate Set Master Close Highlight an Instrument and add to Group to Synchronize Master first Figure 4 13 The Multi Instruments Synchronization Dialog Box 4 27 5061 5062 User Manual 4 28 X Ch Filter Clock Source All instruments that were detected on the interface bus when ArbConnection was launched will be displayed in the Available Instruments list Before you synchronize instrum
44. ee CIE Channel 1 1 a Res ex ee oven MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC ARE TYPE BIT 11 a e o RUN CONT POSITION o Co i L a b q b A A A son DS o son Figure 3 13 Arm Parameters Using the Manual The manual trigger allows you to trigger or gate the 5062 directly a from the front panel This button is active only when the generator is Trigger placed in external trigger or arm modes The MAN TRIG button is a second function to the Enter button and can be used only when the display is not in editing mode Using the SYNC For safety reasons every time you turn the 5062 OFF and ON the SYNC output defaults to OFF If you want to use the SYNC output Output you must turn it on immediately after you power up the generator You can turn the SYNC on using the ON OFF SYNC hot key as was explained earlier in this chapter or you can do it from the Outputs menus shown in Figure 3 14 PROGRAM ON OFF EE el SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 CHI cH OUTPUT SYNC a X Baje SE o Channel 2 eas orr Lem Ce Filter NONE Offset Channel 2 odos a Ss OS MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 11 BREAKPOINT 1 e O o RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE Ez gt 4 b d b A A A q A a son am Do son BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF Figure 3 14 SYNC and Filter Parameters 3 20 Using the Instrument Applying Fil
45. element was received but the instrument does not accept one in this position 131 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for a numeric parameter The suffix may have been misspelled 148 Character data not allowed A character data element was encountered where prohibited by the instrument 200 Execution error This is the generic syntax error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors Execution error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 221 Setting conflict Two conflicting parameters were received which cannot be executed without generating an error Listed below are events causing setting conflicts 1 Sum of pulse or ramp parameters is more than 100 Corrective action Change parameters to correct the problem 2 ampl 2 offset is more than 5 Corrective action Reduce offset to 0 then change amplitude offset values to correct the problem 3 Activating filters when the 5062 is set to output the built in sine waveform or activating the built in sine waveform when one of the 5062 filters is turned on Corrective action If in sine select another function and activate the filter s 5 65 5061 5062 User Manual 5 66 4 Activating burst mode when the 5062 is set to sequence mode or activating sequence mode when the 5062 is set to burst mode Corrective action Remove the 5062 from burst or sequence and then selected the desired mode 5 Changing operating mode from trigge
46. end of the pulse train Insert Section The insert Section command lets you insert a new section in between sections that were already designed Only one new section can be inserted at the middle of the train If an empty section already exists the insert command will alert for an error Delete Section The Delete Section command lets you remove sections from the pulse train without affecting the rest of the train If you use this command from the Edit menu make sure that the section you want to remove is currently the active section Remove all Sections The Remove all Sections command lets you remove the entire pulse design from the pulse screen and start from a fresh page 4 57 5061 5062 User Manual View Commands 4 58 W Pulse Editor Section 2 lt Points gt xi m Section Structure Lal Time Cumulative evel interval Time 0 0 0 Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation This command is extremely useful in cases where you unintentionally delete a section from the pulse train and want to restore it to the screen The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the pulse area The View commands include Pulse Editor Full Train or individual Sections Channel 1 and 2 screens and Options Description of the view commands is given in the following Pulse Editor The view Pulse Editor command invokes a dialog box as shown in Figure 4 31 In general the pulse editor i
47. frequency for channel 2 can be divided by n In this case the sample clock for channel 1 will be X and the sample clock for channel 2 will be X n This command sets the dividing ratio for channel 2 e lt divider gt sets the dividing ratio for channel 2 Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt divider gt 1 to 65535 FREQuency RASTer DIVider Response and default The 5062 will return the present channel 2 sample clock frequency divider value Default value is 1 FSK FREQuency RASTer lt FM_sclk gt Purpose This command will set the shift sample clock frequency When set to operate in FSK mode the 5062 will hop from carrier sample clock frequency to shifted sample clock frequency e lt FSK_sclk gt will set the shifted sample clock frequency for the FSK mode Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt FSK_sclk gt 100e 3 to 50e6 in units of samples per second FSK FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 5062 will return the present shifted sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 40e3 5 26 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem FSK MODE HOP RAMPed Purpose This command will select one of the FSK modes HOP will select non delayed hops from carrier sclk to shifted sclk e RAMPed will select ramped shifts from carrier sclk to shifted sclk Parameter type Discret
48. function generator SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Waveform Square wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 50Q 5 Connect the function generator output to the 5062 rear panel TRIG IN connector 6 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FSK ON Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Square wave Period ims Max A 1 25MHz Min A MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for chan 2 6 18 Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics Test Results Pass Fail ei NOTE Leave the same setup for the next test Ramped FSK Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package function generator Preparation Use the same preparation as in the previous test except make the following changes in the setup 1 Change the 5062 FSK Type to RAMP 2 Change function generator output frequency to 200Hz Test Procedure 1 Verify FSK operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Ramped square Period 5ms Rise Fall Time 1ms Max A 1 25MHz Min A 1MHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2
49. if present 5062 setting is USER or SEQ lt SINusoid gt selects sine waveform lt TRlangle gt selects triangular waveform lt SQUare gt selects square waveform lt PULSe gt selects pulse waveform lt RAMP gt selects ramp waveform lt SINC gt selects sinc waveform lt EXPonential gt selects exponential waveform lt GAUSsian selects gaussian waveform lt NOISe gt selects random noise waveform lt DC gt selects dc waveform Parameter type Discrete FUNCtion SHAPe Response and default The 5062 will return SIN TRI SQU PULS RAMP SINC EXP GAUS NOIS or DC depending on the present 5062 setting Default value is SIN ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal Purpose This command will select the reference source for the sample clock generator e lt INTernal gt selects an internal source The internal source could be either the standard 100 ppm oscillator or the optional 1 ppm TCXO e lt EXTernal gt activates the external reference input An external reference must be connected to the 5062 for it to continue normal operation Parameter type Discrete ROSCillator SOURce Response and default The 5062 will return INT or EXT depending on the present 5062 setting Default value is INT SWEep STOP lt stop_sclk gt Purpose This command will set the stop sample clock frequency When set to operate in sweep mode the 5062 will sweep from carrier sample clock frequency to sweep stop sample clock frequency e lt stop_sclk
50. is simple and intuitive and only requires that visa32 dll runtime file be added to your Windows system folder Download the file from NI s National instrument web site www ni com Installation and operating instruction for ArbConnection are given in Chapter 4 The USB driver is required if you intend to connect the 5062 to a host computer on a USB bus Information how to connect the USB cable and how to load the software is given in this chapter In general the 5062 can be controlled from remote using one of the following interfaces USB Ethernet and GPIB Remote interface cables are not supplied with the instrument so if you plan on using one of the remote programming option make sure you have a suitable cable to connect to your host computer The following paragraphs describe how to connect and configure the 5062 to operate from remote The description is given for computers fitted with Windows XP but little changes will show while installing software on different Windows versions You can connect your Tabor Electronics 5062 to GPIB USB or LAN adapters depending on your application and requirements from your system Installing interface adapters in your computer will not be described in this manual since the installation procedures for GPIB Connection USB Connection LAN Connection Selecting a Remote interface Configuring the Instrument 2 Selecting a Remote interface these adapters change frequently You must fol
51. network Description of the LAN settings and information how to change them is given in the following Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface B Note Configuring your LAN setting does not automatically select the LAN as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select Interface menu described on page 2 7 SSS PROGRAM ON OFF Gy ps5 50MS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 CHI cH2 output SYNC e D DOB Select TCP IP Network Properties a B C ae Interface Physical Address 00 C0 17 41 00 00 Host Name WW1072 PROT IP Address 192 168 0 233 CJ a Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 OOO aw Check with your network administrator before choosing an IP address to avoid ENTER conflicts with other network devices MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE ARM OFF FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 e a o SD Vo 8 4 f D H gt q A A son Figure 2 11 LAN Configuration Screen There are three LAN parameters in this screen that can be modified and adjusted specifically to match your network setting These are described below Consult your network administrator for the setting that will best suit your application e IP address The unique computer readable address of a device on your network An IP address typically is represented as four decimal numbers separated by periods for example 192 160 0 233 Refer to the next section Choosing a Static IP Address
52. of points remain constant This means that 32 waveform points will remain for the carrier and for the shifted waveforms From this statement we can now compute the sample clock for the shifted frequency using the following equation F 32 Pts x 1 5MHz 48MS s 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FSK Make sure the FSK Type shown in this display is Hop and the Carrier frequency is 32MS s 2 Press Hop Sample Clk soft key and program the hop value to 48Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Apply your FSK control signal to the rear panel trigger input If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate FSK modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms 1MHz and shifted frequency of 1 5MHz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 500 carrier frequency is 32MHz Shifted frequency is 48MHz Example 2 FSK Using This example will show how to generate FSK modulation using Arbitrary Waveforms arbitrary waveforms The carrier frequency will be set to 10kHz and the shifted frequency
53. potato 1 13 Segment 1 Sin x x Waveform EEN 1 19 Segment 2 Sine Wav Mica 1 19 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform oocoonnnccccnnonocccononannncnnnnnnnnncnnnnennnnnnannn nn nn ana ner nr nn nr reas 1 20 Sequenced WAVES sir ia is 1 20 Selecting a Remote interface ecos aca 2 8 ES Ee le Te len EE 2 9 USB RE D 2 9 Found New Hardware Wizard WEE 2 10 Choose Your Search and installation Options ooonoccccconicccccnnnoncccnonnnncccnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnncncnnns 2 11 New Hardware Found and Software metalle 2 11 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port 2 12 Choose Your Search and installation Options oooonoccccconicccccnnnocccnnnonancncnnnnnrnccnonananccnnnnns 2 12 New Hardware Found and Software metalle 2 13 Model 5062 Configured for USB Operation oooooccccnoccccccnonoccccnonancncnnnanocononnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnns 2 14 LAN COnfiQuration Sereen EE 2 15 Reset 5062 to Factory RTE EE 3 4 5062 Front Panel Operation EE 3 6 Enabling and Disabling the Outputs id ent ese 3 8 Selecting an Output Waveform Type AAA 3 9 List of Figures continued 3 5 Modifying Output Frequency EE 3 11 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Freouency nennen 3 12 3 7 Programming Sample Clock Frequency Divider AAA 3 13 3 8 Programming Amplitude and Oifteet AAA 3 15 3 9 Run Mode Options dina eege 3 15 3 10 Trigger Run Mode WE EE 3 17 3 11 Gated Mode Parade cis en Re ee 3 18 3 12 Burst Run Mode Parameters ini ra 3 19 IA ten AP AL ITIO EE 3 19 3 14 SYNG aid Filler EE 3 20
54. power cord Maintenance and calibration procedures sometimes call for operation of the unit with power applied and protective covers removed Read the procedures and heed warnings to avoid live circuits points Before operation this instrument 1 Ensure the instrument is configured to operate on the voltage at the power source See Installation Section 2 Ensure the proper fuse is in place for the power source to operate 3 Ensure all other devices connected to or in proximity to this instrument are properly grounded or connected to the protective third wire earth ground If the instrument fails to operate satisfactorily shows visible damage has been stored under unfavorable conditions has sustained stress Do not operate until performance is checked by qualified personnel Table of Contents Chapter Title Page 1 Getting Slanted E 1 1 Wh ts in TAS EE 1 3 IntroductiON EE 1 3 5062 Feature FOIOS at died cia 1 3 ArbGonnection Feature Highlights ce cometa dnd 1 4 le le EE 1 7 Safety CONSI MON EH 1 9 feel WEE 1 9 Specification EE 1 9 Functional ee el EE 1 9 Front Panel Connectors oeeie erroei are aa eaea idad 1 10 Channel 1 Output ss seca ead cesta rete ee eege 1 10 Channel ERR Rite a lle 1 10 Ad Tee e 1 10 Front Ane lINGIGAIONS sc2 3 09 sce EE 1 10 Front Panel Controls s m sad 1 10 Rear Panel Comet Sueras Ida 1 12 AMIN EE 1 13 TPA SIN ie E Ss 1 13 SIIN EE 1 14 eu ll WEE 1 14 SUR OUT A A EE 1 14 ST
55. programs IVI Driver ArbConnection USB driver and some other utilities to aid you with the operation of the instrument For bench operation all that you need from the CD is this manual however it is recommended that you stow away the CD in a safe place in case you ll want to use the 5062 from a host computer or in a system The V driver is a useful utility that provides standard communication and commands structure to control the 5062 from remote Programming examples are also available to expedite your software development The IVI driver comes free with the 5062 however you ll need the IVI engine and visa32 dll run time utilities to be able to use the IVI driver The additional utilities can be downloaded for free from Ne National instrument web site www ni com ArbConnection is a user friendly program that lets you control the instruments functions and features from a remote computer It also lets you generate and edit arbitrary waveforms on the screen build sequence tables modulating signals and much more and then download the signals to your 5062 without the hustle of writing complex programs and utilities This is also a great tool for you to experiment simple or complex command string to gain experience before you write your own code ArbConnection has a command editor feature that allows direct low level programming of the 5062 using SCPI commands just as you will be using them in your program Installation of ArbConnection
56. queue the generator responds with 0 No error The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed The RST command does not clear the error queue Use the following command to read the error queue SYSTem ERRor Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 80 characters 102 Syntax error A complete listing of the errors that can be detected by the generator is given below 100 Command error When the generator cannot detect more specific errors this is the generic syntax error used 101 Invalid Character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type 102 Syntax error Invalid syntax found in the command string 103 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string A comma may have been used instead of a colon or a semicolon In some cases where the generator cannot detect a specific separator it may return error 100 instead of this error 104 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than allowed 108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header 109 Missing parameter Too few parameters were received for the command One or more parameters that were required for the command were omitted 128 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data
57. segment is not limited For example let consider two segments the first being a 1000 point waveform and the second with 100 points If you delete segment 1 you can reprogram another waveform to segment 1 with size to 1000 points If you reprogram segment 1 with 1004 points the instrument will generate an error 5 50 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem and will not accept this waveform On the other hand if you delete segment 2 which was the last segment you programmed then you can reprogram this segment with waveforms having length limited only by the size of the entire memory space e lt segment_number gt will select the segment number that will be deleted TRACe DELete ALL Purpose This command will delete all segments and will clear the entire waveform memory This command is particularly important in case you want to de fragment the entire waveform memory and start building your waveform segments from scratch Y Tip The TRAC DEL ALL command does not re write the memory so whatever waveforms were downloaded to the memory are still there for recovery The TRAC DEL ALL command clears the segment table You can recover memory segments by using the TRAC DEF command You can also use this technique to resize or combine waveform segments TRACe SELect lt segment_number gt Purpose This command will select the active waveform segment for the output By selecting the active segment you are performing two function 1 Succ
58. selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download segment table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of segments is 1 maximum number of segments is 2048 3 Maximum segment size depends on segment size With the basic 5062 you can program maximum 1M in one segment 4 Segment table data has 64 bit values of which 32 bits are used for start address and 32 bits are used for segment size Therefore Data for each segment must have 8 bytes 5 The number of bytes in a complete segment table must divide by 8 The Model 5062 has no control over data sent to its segment table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous memory partition 6 First segment address starts at 256 decimal or 0x100 in hex 7 Compute the start address for segment n using the following equation ADD ADD SIZE 4 For example say you have two segments the first is 10 000 points The start address for segment number 2 is as follows ADD ADD SIZE 4 5 52 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem 256 10 000 4 256 2 500 2756 and in hex 0x100 0x9C4 OxAC4 The segment size is entered using the actual size of the segment Do not divide the segment size as was done for the address For a size of 10 000 use 0x2710 Generating Sequenced Waveforms Sequenced waveforms are made of a number of arbitrary waveforms which can be linked an
59. semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if both the colon and the semicolon are not used OUTP STATE ON TRIG BURS ON The MIN and MAX Parameters Querying Parameter Setting Query Response Format SCPI Command Terminator IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands Remote Programming Reference Introduction To SCPI Substitute MINimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for some commands For example consider the following command FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency to its maximum value Query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark to the command For example the following command sets the output function to square SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU Query the output function by executing SOUR FUNC SHAP The response to a query depends on the format of the command In general a response to a query contains current values or settings of the generator Commands that set values can be queried for their current value Commands that set modes of operation can be queried for their current mode IEEE STD 488 2 common queries generate responses which are common to all IEEE STD 488 2 compatible instruments A command string sent to the function generator must terminat
60. set by the stop sclk parameter to start frequency set by the sclk parameter Parameter type Discrete SWEep DIiRection Response and default The 5062 will return UP or DOWN depending on the present 5062 setting Default value is UP SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Purpose 5 29 5061 5062 User Manual This command will select the sweep spacing from linear spacing and logarithmic spacing e lt LINear gt will select linear steps e lt LOGarithmic gt will select logarithmic steps Parameter type Discrete SWEep SPACing Response and default The 5062 will return LIN or LOG depending on the present 5062 setting Default value is LIN SWEep TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGered GATEd Purpose This command will select one of the sweep modes e CONTinuous will select continuous sweep modulation e TRIGered will select triggered sweep modulation GATEd will select gated sweep modulation Parameter type Discrete SWEep TRIGger MODE Response and default The 5062 will return CONT TRIG or GATE depending on its present setting Default is CONT SWEep TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will select slope sensitivity for the sweep trigger input POSitive will select rising edge NEGative will select falling edge Parameter type Discrete SWEep TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 5062 will return POS or NEG depending on its present setting Default is POS SWEep MARKer lt mark_scik gt Purpose
61. setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting Slope The Slope group lets you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 5062 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the Source instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal The 5062 can accept triggers from a number of sources External Internal or software command You must have a valid trigger signal applied to the rear panel trigger input to use the external trigger source option If you do not have an external source you can always use the internal trigger generator or press a front panel manual trigger to stimulate an output Click on one of the trigger source option buttons to select the required trigger source You can also program the internal trigger period after you point and click on Arm Timer The Arm group is almost an orphan on the Trigger Panel This is the only function that actually will work in continuous mode only however since the arm commands cause interruption of the 396 output and arm control is done with the trigger input it was placed in the trigger section of ArbConnection While m
62. shape area and control buttons When you point and click on one of the waveforms its shape is shown in the Waveform Shape window The Segment Table has four fields The Seg field contains numbers from 1 through 2048 designating the programmed memory segment Note that memory segments are numbered from 1 to 2048 The State field shows the current status of the memory segment It can be Free if no file has yet been assigned to this segment number or Mapped if file name has been assigned to the segment but the Download button has not been used yet to move the file to the 5062 memory or Loaded if the process has been completed by pressing either the Download button or the All download all button The File field is an edit field that lets you browse and select file names to be applied to a specific memory segment To change or add file name point and click on the File name field and either type your path or browse to the file location and let Windows find the right path The Length field displays the length of the selected memory segment Memory segments size may be programmed from 16 to 1M Note that the length field is not accessible and shown for reference purpose only 4 15 5061 5062 User Manual 4 16 Waveform Studio lt Channel 1 gt xx gt Segment table Seg State Link Seg Loops Adv 1 Loaded 2 Loaded 3 Mapped 4 Loaded 5 Free Length C Program Files Fluke Wave_1 w
63. the last depends on the memory option In cases where smaller waveform lengths are required the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments When the instrument is programmed to output arbitrary waveforms the clock samples the data points one at a time from address 0 to the last address The rate at which each sample is replayed is defined by the sample clock rate parameter The 5062 provides programmable sample clock rates from 100mS s to 50MS s Unlike the built in standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms must first be loaded into the instrument s memory Correct memory management is required for best utilization of the arbitrary memory An explanation of how to manage the arbitrary waveform memory is given in the following paragraphs Arbitrary memory Management The arbitrary memory in comprised of a finite length of words The maximum size arbitrary waveform that can be loaded into memory is 1M Waveforms are created using small sections of the arbitrary memory The memory can be partitioned into smaller segments up to 2048 and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment each having a unique length Minimum segment size is 16 points as long as its playback time is more than 10us Information on how to partition the memory define segment length and download waveform data to the 5062 is given in the following paragraphs 5 47 5061 5062 User Manual TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt Purpose This command will
64. the new parameter value If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate linearly swept waveforms from 25kHz to 100Hz in 10ms We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is sine wave having fixed amplitude level of 1V into 50Q The waveform is swept from 25 6 MHz to 102 4kHz in 10ms Sweep step is linear 3 47 5061 5062 User Manual Example 2 Generating Sweep Using Arbitrary Waveforms 3 48 This example will show how to generate sweep modulation using the arbitrary waveforms The start frequency will be set to 100Hz and the stop frequency to 25kHz We ll be using linear sweep in the up direction in 10ms We ll monitor the sweep modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start with our 5062 setting we must know the length of the arbitrary segment that well use To simplify matters let s download a 100 waveform points triangular waveform to the segment 1 You can use Tabor Electronics for this purpose Information how to create and download waveforms to the arbitrary memory is given in Chapter 4 We want the start frequency to be 100Hz Bearing in mind th
65. to prepare the Model 5062 for operation Details are provided for initial inspection grounding safety requirements repackaging instructions for storage or shipment installation information and Ethernet address configuration Unpacking and handling of the generator requires normal precautions and procedures applicable to handling of sensitive electronic equipment The contents of all shipping containers should be checked for included accessories and certified against the packing slip to determine that the shipment is complete The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present A CAUTION This product is intended for use by qualified persons who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read the operating information carefully before using the product Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on power cables connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standard Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60 VDC are present A WARNING For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instrument parts while power is applied to the circuit under test
66. value is OFF OUTPut SYNC SOURce BIT LCOMplete Purpose This command will select the 5062 SYNC option e BIT will set the SYNC to output a narrow pulse e LCOMplete will set the SYNC to transition high at the beginning of the sequence and low a the end of the sequence Parameter type Discrete OUTPut SYNC SOURce Response and default The 5062 will return BIT or LCOM depending on the present setting of the SYNC source Default value is BIT OUTPut SYNC POSition lt position gt Purpose This command will program the 5062 SYNC position This command is active in arbitrary USER mode only The SYNC position is programmable per channel e lt position gt will set the SYNC position in waveform points Parameter type Numeric integer only 5 38 Remote Programming Reference OUTPut Subsystem Parameter range lt position gt 0 to 1M in units of waveform points The sync position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum OUTPut SYNC POSition Response and default The 5062 will return the present SYNC position value Default value is 0 OUTPut SYNC WIDTh lt width gt Purpose This command will program the width of the SYNC pulse The sync width can be varied through a limited range to allow widening of the sync pulse The SYNC width is programmable per channel e width gt will set the SYNC width Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt width gt 4 to 100000 in units of waveform points The w
67. wavelength parameter For example if you have 1024 horizontal points your equation will be computed along 1024 points as a function of the vertical scale Each vertical sample is computed separately and placed along the horizontal axis The points are graphically connected to form a uniform and continuous waveform shape however if you zoom in on a waveform line you ll see that the points are connected like a staircase In reality the 5062 generates its waveforms exactly as shown on the screen but if the waveform has many horizontal points the steps get smaller and harder to see without magnification Equations are always computed as a function of the vertical Amplitude axis therefore the left side of your equation will always look as Amplitude p where p is the equation variables in units of waveform points You can write equations with up to 256 characters If the equation is too long to fit in the visible field parts to the left or right will scroll off the ends The following paragraphs describe the conventions that are used for writing an equation To avoid errors it is extremely important that you make yourself familiar with these conventions before you plan your waveforms Equations are written in conventional mathematical notation You may only enter the right part of the equation The only limitation is that the equation must be of a single variable that is directly related to the current horizontal axis setting Case i
68. will turn white as opposed to the Segment Table area that turns gray There are four major elements that you should consider while programming a sequence table They are Link Seg Loops and Adv These terms are explained below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the links in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations how you associate links to segments except you cannot program in the sequence table segments that were not defined earlier Loops This parameter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Adv This parameter flags the advance mode for the specific segment This flag is active when the advance mode is Stepped When set to 0 the sequence will advance through the list automatically until a segment that is flagged 1 is encountered When 1 is encountered the generator will idle on this segment until an external trigger is applied Learn more about the sequence advance modes in Chapter 3 Figure 4 8 shows
69. x argument mathematical expression After you get familiar with the operands and conventions you can commence with a few simple equations and see what they do to your waveform screen Once you ll get the feel you ll be able to explore your own creativity to generate much more complicated and complex waveforms If you remember from your old high school studies the simplest curve of Y as a function of A is defined by the equation Y aX b You can use the same technique to generate straight lines with the Equation Editor Assuming first that p 0 try this Amplitude p 1000 Press Preview and see what you get Of course you get an uninteresting line that runs parallel to the X axis Now lets give the line some angle by typing Amplitude p 2 p 2000 Press Preview and see that the line slopes down It may still be not very interesting however pay close attention to the convention that is used in this equation You cannot type Amplitude p 2p 1000 like you would normally do in your notebook You must use the multiply sign otherwise you ll get a syntax error Now we ll try to generate a simple sine waveform Try this 4 47 5061 5062 User Manual Equation Samples 4 48 Amplitude p sin 10 Press Preview and sorry you still get nothing on the screen The Wave Composer did not make a mistake The sine of 10 in radians is exactly what it shows You are unable to see the result because the line on your sc
70. you choose will be the best match for your hardware Figure 2 5 Choose Your Search and installation Options Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for e TABOR Ww5062 USB Waveform Generator Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 6 New Hardware Found and Software installed Figure 2 6 shows that the Tabor Electronics 5062 USB Waveform Generator has been found and software driver installed However the process does not end at this point but continues to assign a logical port address to the USB driver After you click on Finish the Found New Hardware message appears however this time it has found a USB serial port as shown in Figure 2 7 5061 5062 User Manual 2 12 i Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Figure 2 7 Found New Hardware USB Serial Port Proceed with the installation till a logical drive is assigned to the USB port The process is very similar to what you have done before just select the path and options in the next dialog box and click on Next as shown in Figure 2 8 To complete the process click on Finish Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Os si Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this lo
71. 0MHz ECL 100K compatible Sample clock can be frequency modulated by internal waveforms that are resident in internal memory fixed waveforms Internal sine square triangle and ramp 1mHz to 100kHz 9 digits 0 1 lt 0 1 100mS s to 50MS s Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency FM Downloaded Arbitrary Waveforms A 2 Description Modulation Source Modulation Sample Clock Range Resolution Accuracy Modulating Frequency Distortion Sample Clock Deviation Range Advance Marker Output and Level Position Waveform Download Sample clock can be frequency modulated arbitrary waveforms that are downloaded by the user user waveforms User waveform any shape 10 to 20000 waveform points 1mS s to 2MS s 9 digits 0 1 lt 0 1 100mS s to 50MS s Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency Through USB ENET or DMA channel through GPIB FSK Description Carrier Sample Clock Range FSK Source External Frequency Range FSK Delay Ramped FSK Description Ramp Time Range Sweep Description Type Direction Range Time Advance Marker Output and Level Position OPERATING MODES Normal Triggered Gated External Burst Internal Burst Trigger Sources External Input Level Slope Sensitivity Frequency Internal Range Resolution Accuracy Software Appendi
72. 1 kHz Amplitude 5Vp p Offset 2 5V 5 Connect the function generator output to the 5062 rear panel AM input 6 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode AM ON Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify AM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Amplitude Modulated Sine Modulation Depth 100 10 Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 23 5061 5062 User Manual Adjustments Introduction Description Environmental Conditions Required Equipment Instrument DMM This document contains the calibration procedure for the 50MS s dual channel Universal Waveform Generator Model 5062 A list of specifications is given in Appendix A of the Operations Manual The calibration procedures that are described in this document are for use by qualified service personnel only Do not perform these procedures unless qualified to do so This procedure is intended to be used once before complete and final performance verification to verify that the 5062 meets or exceeds its published specifications The 5062 is a bench type instrument The output can generate a standard set of waveforms These waveforms include Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Gaussian Exponential Decaying Rising Pulse Nois
73. 2 6 4MS s Use the keypad and the dial to program the parameter Press Enter and watch the value displayed at the bottom of the screen At this time if you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate frequency modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 1MHz deviation frequency of 100kHz and modulating frequency of 100Hz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 50Q carrier frequency is 32MHz deviated 3 2MHz above and below the carrier frequency setting modulating waveform frequency is 100Hz Example 2 Modulating This example will show how to generate frequency modulation Standard Waveforms using the standard waveforms and the Arbitrary FM Mode The Using the Arbitrary FM Output frequency will be set to 2MHz Deviation Range to 100kHz Mode and 100Hz sine as the modulating waveform We ll monitor the frequency modulation from the front panel outputs and then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start setting up the modulation parameters we need to 3 37 5061 5062 User Manual 3 38 get some information from the instrument Do the following Select the Sine waveform from t
74. 212 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 2 segments into the segment table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 6 The generator accepts binary data as 64 bit integers which are sent as long Therefore the total number of bytes is always eight times the number of segments For example 48 bytes are required to download 6 segments to the segment table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as segment table data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary_block gt Represents segment table data The segment table data is made of 48 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 48 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 5062 as segment table data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Each channel has its own segment table buffer Therefore make sure you
75. 3 15 Modifying the SCLK and 10MHz Clock Gource 3 22 3 16 The Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ooooococccconoccccnncocccnnannnoos 3 23 3 17 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters ooocoooonccccnncccccnonancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 3 25 3 18 Using ArbConnection to Generate Sequences ooooocccccnnnccccccnnononcnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnn cnn nnnnncnnnnnns 3 26 3 19 Sequence Parameters ek 3 28 3 20 Editing the Sequence Table ua id ds ia 3 30 3 21 Sequence Advance ODOM ue eric a ia 3 32 3 22 Selecting a Modulated Waveform AAA 3 33 3 23 FM Modulation e ias 3 34 3 24 Using ArbConnection to Generate Arbitrary Modulating Waveiomms 3 38 3 25 ENEE 3 40 3 26 Sweep E lut EE 3 43 32 EEN DIE ibid 3 49 3 28 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels oncoccconcoccccnononcccnnnnncncncnnnnnncncnnnnnn cnn conan ncnn cnn 3 50 3 29 Wiring Diagram Master to Slave EEN 3 51 3 30 Setting up Master Slave Parameters AAA 3 52 4 1 Startup amp Communication ele e 4 5 4 2 ArbConnection s TODAS viii ad 4 5 4 3 The MAA dt le aer dE 4 8 4 4 The Standard Waveforms Palacio 4 10 4 5 The Arbitrary A Sequence Panel ENEE 4 12 4 6 The Memory Partition Tale eege EES Siecle on Aaa 4 14 4 The Waveform SU Oy EE 4 16 EU WEE EE 4 18 4 9 The TOO STAG EE 4 20 4 10 The Modulation Panel EE 4 22 4 11 The Modulation Sa E 4 25 4 12 The Utility Palin gengen SEENEN ENEE ENEE NEEN ENEE 4 27 4 13 The Multi Instruments Synchronization Dialo
76. 4 25 4 49 5061 5062 User Manual 00 sinfom j 1 or g p cos omg p 30 S11 Figure 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms In the following example as shown in Figure 4 29 20 second harmonic distortion has been added to a standard sinewave The original waveform had a peak to peak value of 6000 points so 20 second harmonic is equivalent to 4000 points The frequency of the second harmonic is obviously double that of the fundamental so term 1200 sin 2 omg p is added to the original sine wave equation Use the following equation Amplitude p 6000 sin omg p 1200 sine 2 0omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 26 4 50 ArbConnection 4 sinfomg p 1 200 sin 2 oma p ES 5 767 1023 Points Figure 4 26 Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion In Figure 4 30 we created 10 cycles of sinewave made to decay exponentially The original expression for a standard sinewave is multiplied by the term e p 250 Increasing the value of the divisor 200 in this case will slow down the rate of decay Use the following equation Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p 10 e p 250 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 27 4 51 5061 5062 User Manual 51 1023 Points Figure 4 27 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave The last example as show
77. ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system before connecting cables or jumpers installing or removing cards from the computer or making internal changes such as changing the module address Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Always keep your hands dry while handling the instrument 2 3 5061 5062 User Manual Performance Checks Power Requirements Grounding Requirements 2 4 When using test fixtures keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Carefully read the Safety Precautions instructions that are supplied with your test fixtures Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables Only qualified service personnel should perform maintenance The instrument has been inspected for mechanical and electrical performance before shipment from the factory lt is free of physical defects and in perfect electrical order Check the instrument for damage in transit and perform the electrical procedures outlined in the section entitled Unpacking and Initial Inspection The function generator may be operated from a wide range of mains voltage 85 to 265 Vac Voltage selection is automatic and does not require switch setting The instrument operates over the power mains frequency range of 48 to 63Hz Always verify that the operating power mains voltage is the same as that specif
78. Channel 1 2 output to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode Continuous Waveform TTL Output 4 Connect the function generator TTL output to the 5062 TRIG IN connector 5 Connect the function generator main output to the 2 channel of the oscilloscope 6 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Triggered Output On 6 13 5061 5062 User Manual Test Procedure 1 Modify phase start from 0 to 256 512 and 768 points 2 Verify on the oscilloscope that the 5062 start phase changes from 0 to 90 180 and 270 accordingly Test Results Pass Fail Internal Trigger Accuracy Equipment Counter Preparation 1 Configure the counter as follows Function Freq A Coupling DC 500 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the counter input 3 Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Wavelength 16 points Waveform Square wave 4 Configure the 5062 channel 1 as follows Reset Waveform Arbitrary Run Mode Triggered Trigger Source internal Internal Trig As required by the test Output On Test Procedure 1 Set trigger as required in Table 6 12 2 Verify trigger reading as shown in Table 6 12 Test Results Pass Fail Table 6 12 Internal Trigger Generator Operation
79. E dee 3 43 Example 1 Generating Sweep Using Standard Waveforms ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 45 Example 2 Generating Sweep Using Arbitrary Waveforms cccceeeeeeeeeeenees 3 47 e RE 3 48 iii 5061 5062 User Manual Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels cceecccesseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeesneneeenseeeeesnees 3 49 synchronizing Multiple Instruments comicos iria dd iii 3 51 4 del d ln O iaa 4 1 What s in This ee 4 3 Introduction to AroConnection EE 4 3 ie Rue L leeden EE 4 3 QUtINg ArbCO MCU dia 4 4 For the New and Advanced Users cccoconnonnccccccononcnnannccoconoconnnnnnnnnnnnnn cnn rre 4 4 Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 Ree En eer 4 5 ArbGonnection Features enge ee EE 4 6 The Control Panels ai 4 6 The le Bea EE 4 8 The Standard Waveforms Panes dle 4 10 The Arbitrary amp te 4 11 Using the Memory Partition Table cocsssscasccacssaatsnts dessa tenes deg deeg ES 4 13 Using the Waveform Studio srta tna 4 15 The Trigger Pano insistido 4 20 THe Modulation Panel Tarna a 4 22 ER iere ear ege ee E E E 4 22 Eege Eege 4 23 The Modulation Panel Zas Udo cido 4 24 PN A E Ln ese eh Rid an Dorel EE 4 24 SSWOGD a E E udateadeurtanesagidsauetens 4 25 The TING ET WEE 4 26 The Reuler 4 29 THE Wave COMPOSE eege 4 30 TE Commands Da Ea EE a ka 4 30 RRE ee or LEE 4 38 THE Waveform Screen EE 4 38 The PIV OMPOS ee dad 4 40 The Commands A O trr tnn esere treerne 4 40 Generating Waveforms Using t
80. Figure 4 36 the generator determines that the waveform mode be arbitrary and only one segment can be ArbConnection 4 loaded with the pulse train Memory management By selecting the arbitrary mode of operation the pulse train is forced to a single segment This summary shows which segment has been populated and how much memory was used to build the required pulse train Instrument Settings Show the amplitude offset and sample clock settings that will be changed on the generator The settings in this summary cannot be affected from the pulse editor options settings These are being computed and modified specifically for the current pulse train pattern and will change from pattern to pattern Accept Reject These buttons are the final step before you download the pulse train to the instrument If you are unhappy with the instrument setting and want to change some of the options there is still time Point and click on the Reject button and go do your changes Point and click on the Accept button to complete the download process 4 73 5061 5062 User Manual 4 74 Chapter 5 Remote Programming Reference Title Page What s In This Chapter EE 5 3 Inirod ction TO SCP EE 5 3 ellene Bt un ET 5 4 Command Separar iste te as A ed es Paste Se NR eee a AA le 5 4 The MIN and MAX Darameterg nn noc nonannnnnns 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting WEE 5 5 Query Response FOE ien e EE eg Mie Sergei 5 5 SCP Command E nn e te 5 5 IEEE
81. Hz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 102 4000KS s In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the SCLK value and the number of points used for generating the current waveform In this case the number of points is computed from the relationship N SCLK Freq 102 4kS s 100Hz 1024 points 2 Now it is time to check if the number of points will not conflict at the stop frequency We can check this by dividing the maximum possible sample frequency by the number of points from the above calculations Fstop_max 50MS s 1024Pts 48 828125kHz In this case we should be safe because we plan to sweep to 25kHz only 3 Now we have to compute the sample clock frequency at the stop point Knowing already the number of points we have in this waveform the sample frequency at the stop point is computed using the following equation Fstop 1024Pts x 25kHz 25 6MS s 4 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type Sweep 5 Select and press the Sweep Time soft key and program the sweep time parameter to 10ns Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value 6 Select and press the Stop Sample Clk soft key and program the stop sample clock parameter to 25 6MS s Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value Press Enter to lock in
82. IA adapters Ports COM amp LPT EI Communications Port COM1 ECP Printer Port LPT1 4 USB Serial Port COM3 Processors Sound video and game controllers System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers TABOR W W5062 USB Waveform Generator Standard Universal PCI to USB Host Controller Standard Universal PCI to USB Host Controller USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Figure 2 10 Model 5062 Configured for USB Operation LAN Configuration 2 14 There are several parameters that you may have to set to establish network communications using the LAN interface Primarily you ll need to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communications with the LAN interface To change LAN configuration you need to access the LAN 10 100 screen as shown in Figure 2 11 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The LAN 10 100 soft key will update the display with the LAN parameters Note there are some parameters that are shown on the display that cannot be accessed or modified These are Physical Address and Host Name These parameters are set in the factory and are unique for product The only parameters that can be modified are the IP Address the Subnet mask and the Default gateway Correct setting of these parameters is essential for correct interfacing with the LAN
83. INE OUT waveform Using this output the sample clock and the shifted sample clock frequencies are used as nominal values If you want to use the FSK function from the front panel then you must compute the actual carrier and shifted frequencies in a similar way as was described above for the FM function When you select FSK modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 24 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms PROGRAM ON OF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 CHI cH2 foutput syne KR 2 Modulation Type FSK Type Hop Sample Cik SS Carrier Sample Clk RRI BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC MOD TYPE BIT 11 Oo We y GE dE en Coy Coy fou A son son MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Figure 3 25 FSK Parameters FSK Type This provides selection between two transition types Hop and Ramp In Hop frequency hops from carrier and back immediately as the waveform cycle is complete Ramped is similar to Hop except when the shift command is issued the output ramps to the shifted frequency and back at a rate set by the ramp time generator The ramp time is programmable from 10us to 1 second lay Note Shifted frequency value in Ramped FSK mode must always be higher than the carrier frequency Reverse setting will not allow the 5062 to execute ramped FSK operation Also SCLK2 SCLK1 gt 10KHz The
84. Index 5 Level 0 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters and the specified point is marked with a red dot Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Section Structure The term Section Structure is used to define part of the pulse train that share common properties There are four parameters that can be programmed in this group Index Level Time Interval and Cumulative Time Index ls added automatically as you program pulse segments The index line is highlighted as you point and click on pulse segments on the pulse editor screen Level Specifies that peak level of the programmed segment As you build the pulse the level window is expended automatically to fit the required amplitude range Note however there is a limit to the level which is being determined by the generator s peak to peak specification Time Interval Specifies the time that will lapse for the current index level You can program the time interval and the cumulative time will be adjusted accordingly Cumulative Time Specifies the time that will lapse from the start of the current pulse section You can program the cumulative time and the time interval will be adjusted accordingly 4 65 5061 5062 User Manual Pulse Example Section 1 4 66 Se
85. M setting to ACV and adjust RV14 AMPL2 for a DMM reading of 3 535 V 20mV 13 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 6V 14 Re adjust RV14 AMPL2 for a DMM reading of 2 121 V 10mV 15 Repeat the sequence above from 11 through 14 until you balance the readings between 10V and 6V settings to within 10mV Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 2 SS Modify 5062 channel 2 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4 46484V Modify the DMM setting DCV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Note and record the offset reading on the DMM Modify 5062 channel 2 offset to 4 46483V Adjust RV17 FINE OFFS2 for offset reading as was recorded in step 3 1mV Channel 2 Offset Adjustment Channel 2 Offset Compensation Maintenance and Performance Checks Adjustment Procedures Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 channel 2 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4V 2 Modify the DMM setting DCV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Adjust RV11 OFFS2 for a DMM reading of 4V 10mV Note and record the value Modify 5062 channel 1 offset to 4V Adjust RV10 NULL2 fora DMM reading as was recorde
86. N EE 1 14 MASTER ISLA VES coi li dali ici 1 14 leegen 1 15 BR E 1 15 5061 5062 User Manual GRID nasa o aio gado 1 15 AG LINE unta ii ia 1 15 e DEE 1 15 R n INTO UGS E 1 15 CONTINUOUS MOOG ee ee atten aed kes nated Naat ce 1 16 Triggered TEE 1 16 E Ne EE 1 16 A a a a a a a a aa a aaien e poora 1 16 Frequency Agility EE 1 16 SINT EEN 1 17 E ee E E E E ee E 1 17 Ramped EE 1 17 O 1 17 UIT TP et a ir caos 1 18 Standard Fixed Wave EE 1 18 Arbitrary User Ee 1 18 SEQUENCE Waveforms iia 1 18 SS ee vache ds Ee 1 20 ll 1 20 Programming E la 1 21 2 Configuring the Instrument oir rail i nica 2 1 Installation OY MIS Wanda 2 3 Unpacking and Initial Inspection cccccccscscssscsescsescsssesssescsescsescsescessesesscsecstscseecsescaeseaeees 2 3 AIST Vile FOC AUINOMS a 2 3 Performance RE 2 4 Power REQUIFEMIGING asin ee enad An a E E EAEn E 2 4 Grounding os 2 4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment ccoo cronos 2 5 Preparation for USA A daha eee 2 5 AS teal At EE 2 5 lued ENEE 2 6 Controlling the Instrument from Hemote kA 2 6 Connecting to a Remote interface isidro 2 6 Selecting a Remote IMOMACe aniones adidas 2 7 GPIB Configuration EE 2 8 USB COMMQUEATION E 2 9 EAN Configurati DEE 2 14 Choosing a Static IP Address viaria 2 16 Contents continued Using E E EE 3 1 EEN beetebuerg ere 3 3 Inter Channel Dependency iia denia 3 3 OUTPUT Terminati N ati ds 3 3 Input Output Protection EE 3 3 Power On Reset Defaul
87. NU LOCAL MAN TRIG FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE 5 7 Selecting a Waveform Type BASE MODE FUNC STD RUN CONT PROGRAM CERA SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 Fe Hi cH2 ce Using the Instrument 3 Selecting a Waveform Type Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 3 Press TOP to display the root menu 4 Press Outputs to open the Outputs dialog box as shown in Figure 3 3 5 Use the dial or arrow keys to access the required field Focus is on a filed that is painted orange 6 To edit the field press Enter The edited field will turn white with orange borders 7 Use the dial or arrow keys to change the field 8 Press Enter again to lock in the setting There are four main types of waveforms that the 5062 can produce Standard Arbitrary Sequenced and Modulated waveforms Standard and modulated waveforms are computed from equations and tables that are built into the program The instrument can output arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only after waveform data has been downloaded into its memory Refer to Figure 3 4 and use the following procedure to select an output type Note that there are sub menus associated with each output type menu Accessing and using these sub menus is described later in this chapter The numbers on Figure 3 4 corr
88. OFF Table 3 2 Front Panel Menus Soft TOP 207 Level 3 Level Key Menu Menu Menu Notes A Waveform A Standard A Waveshape Select from a wave shapes list B Frequency Programs standard waveform frequency C Amplitude Programs output amplitude D Offset Programs output offset 1D 5 Phase Parameters depend on selected shape JD Reset Resets parameters for this waveform only Parameters B Arbitrary A Sample Clock Programs sample clock frequency B Amplitude Programs output amplitude C Offset Programs output offset D Segment Selects an active memory segment Number JD Wave Composer Creates custom waveforms JD Delete Clears the entire arbitrary memory Segments C Sequenced A View Table Displays table and provides editing options B Advance Mode Programs the sequence advance mode C Sample Clock Programs the sample clock frequency D Amplitude Programs output amplitude JD Offset Programs output offset JD Active Segment Selects the active segment in the sequence D Modulated A Modulation Type Selects one of AM FM FSK and Sweep B Parameter depends on selected modulation C Parameter depends on selected modulation D Parameter depends on selected modulation JD Parameter depends on selected modulation D denotes you have to scroll down to access the menu Scroll using the arrows up or down or the dial 3 7 5061 5062
89. ONor1 will set the continuous mode OFF or 0 will set the interrupted mode Parameter type Discrete 5 43 5061 5062 User Manual INITiate CONTinuous Response to query version The 5062 will return O if the output is interrupted or 1 if the output is continuous Default value is 1 TRIGger BURSt OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will set the burst mode This command will affect the 5062 only after it will be set to interrupted operation with the command INIT CONT OFF e ONor1 will set the burst mode on e OFF or 0 will set the burst mode off Parameter type Discrete TRIGger BURSt Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the burst is on or 0 if the burst is off Default value is 0 TRIGger COUNt lt count gt Purpose This command will set the burst counter e lt count gt will set the count number Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt count gt 1 to 1 Meg TRIGger COUNt Response and default The 5062 will return the present count value Default value is 1 TRIGger GATE OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will set the gate mode This command will affect the 5062 only after it will be set to interrupted operation with the command INIT CONT OFF ON or 1 will set the gate mode on OFF or 0 will set the gate mode off Parameter type Discrete TRIGger GATE Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the gate is on or 0 if the gate is off Default value is 0 5 44 Remote Progr
90. POINT 1 O e o RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE EN aA A H gt gt d CH son son Figure 3 15 Modifying the SCLK and 10MHz Clock Source Using the Instrument Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Generating In general the Model 5062 cannot by itself create arbitrary Arbit waveforms If you want to use arbitrary waveforms you must first rbitrary load them into the instrument The 5062 is supplied with waveform Waveforms creation and editing called Tabor Electronics Besides waveform generation Tabor Electronics has instrument control features sequence table generator FM and pulse composers and many other features that will be described separately Figure 3 16 shows an example of a waveform that was created with the Tabor Electronics Once the waveform is created on the screen downloading it to the 5062 is just a click of a mouse away Detailed information on the structure of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 5062 is given in Chapter 5 Information in this Chapter will give you some general idea what arbitrary waveforms are all about E Wave Composer gt C Program Files Fluke File Edit View Wave Download About MACETAS A bile wi ee Presa rbExplor rbExplore x Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster R Anchor 1023 Start pts jo Max 8191 Cycles Manual Scale Ki End p
91. Procedure 1 Perform Sine wave distortion tests on both channels using Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Front Panel Sine wave Distortions Test Distortion Reading g__ SCLK Reading Limits 10 00Hz 40kS s lt 0 1 1 000kHz 4MSis___ lt 0 1 10 00kHz 40Msis__ lt 0 1 50 00kHz 50Ms s lt 0 1 2 Remove the cables from the front panel outputs and connect one cable to the rear panel SINE OUT connector 3 Perform sine wave distortion tests using Table 6 8 Table 6 8 Rear Panel Sine wave Distortions Test Distortion Reading SCLK Setting Reading Limits Rear Panel Sine Out 10 00Hz 10S s lt 0 05 E A ee 100 0Hz 100S s lt 0 05 A ee ee 1 000kHz 1kS s lt 0 05 10 00kHz 10kS s lt 0 05 100 0kHz 100kS s lt 0 05 6 10 Maintenance and Performance Checks Sine Wave Characteristics Sine wave Spectral Equipment Spectrum Analyzer Purity Preparation 1 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 outputs to the spectrum analyzer input Use 50Q and 20dB feedthrough termination at the spectrum analyzer input 2 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency As required by the test Waveform Sine wave Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform front panel sine wave spectral purity tests using Table 6 9 Table 6 9 Front Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test Spectrum Analyzer Reading Limits Start Stop ent CH2 nt 5MHz gt 40dB0 1M 1M 10M 2 R
92. SER SERVICEABLE PARTS CONTAINED AUTOMATIC DO NOT REMOVE COVER REFER SERVICE TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AG VOLTAGE SELECTION A unk N cr PN n MASTENGLAVE FUSE T1 25A 250V TABOR ELECTRONICS www taborelec com MADE IN ISRAEL Figure 1 7 Model 5062 Rear Panel This input accepts signals that amplitude modulates channel 1 2 or both The AM input becomes active only when the AM function is turned on otherwise it has no effect on the output signal In general this input accepts signals that stimulate generation of output waveforms The trigger input is inactive when the generator is in continuous operating mode When placed in trigger gated or burst mode the trigger input is made active and waits for the right condition to trigger the instrument In trigger and burst modes the trigger input is edge sensitive i e it senses transitions from high to low or from low to high The direction of the transition is programmable In gated mode the trigger input is level sensitive i e the generator is gated when the logic level is high and idle when the level is logic low Trigger level for this input is TTL The trigger input is common to both channels Therefore if the 5062 is placed in trigger mode both channels share the same mode and the trigger input causes both channels to start generating waveforms at the same time Phase relationship between channels is tightly controlled in trigger mode You should expect both channels to s
93. STD 488 2 Common Commander llas 5 5 SCPI Parameter Tye Auswee NEEN ad 5 6 Numeric ParaMeterS oooooccccccccccconononccnnnnccononnncnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnanirnnns 5 6 Discreta E 5 6 Boolean Parametros 5 6 Arbitrary Block Parameters seciciocodintoto concordar ito gEE Eegen Ce egene 5 7 Binary Block E EE 5 7 SGP SyMlax and Style ita ri 5 7 SOURCES Subsystem e cea 5 14 SS EE EE 5 37 INS ERER 5 40 TRIG Ger Subsystem io 5 42 A teser Ense rEE EEE Enn esee E nent 5 47 SYSTEM SUBS SUSI NEE 5 57 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries oooconccccnonccnnooancnnoncnnnannnnnn cnn nana nonnnos 5 58 The SCPI Status Registers A secs eas Aa ase ete ee ee eS ee ae 5 59 The Status Byte RAS el te ad 5 60 Reading the Status Byte Register cda 5 62 Clearing the Status Byte EE 5 62 Service Request Enable Register GE 5 62 5 1 5061 5062 User Manual Standard Event Status Register ESR ocococcccoconocincococoncnnonnonconinenonnoninencnnonincorinennos Standard Event Status Enable Register EE Error Message EE 5 2 What s In This Chapter Introduction To SCPI Remote Programming Reference What s In This Chapter This Chapter lists and describes the set of SCPl compatible Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments remote commands used to operate the 5062 To provide familiar formatting for users who have previously used the SCPI reference documentation the command descriptions are dealt with in a s
94. Syntax and Styles iii tada 5 7 SOURce SUSY EE 5 14 QUTPUE SUD SION ET 5 37 INS TruMment SUDSYSIOM ed aa da 5 40 TRIGger SUBS SM ENEE E EAA ES 5 42 TRAGE SUDSYSIG WE 5 47 SYS PEM SUBS Si ella 5 57 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries oooccccccccconcccnonnncnoncnonancnononcnannnnnnnno 5 58 The SCPI Status e EE 5 59 The Status Byte Register STB cuca ds 5 60 Reading the Status Byte Register sionista aed Cen aaa 5 62 Clearing the Status Byte Register AAA 5 62 Service Request Enable Register GREIN 5 62 Standard Event Status Register ESP 5 63 5061 5062 User Manual Standard Event Status Enable Register EE 5 64 Error de 5 64 6 Maintenance and Performance Checks cseccccsseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeaees 6 1 What s in This Chapter socials 6 3 Disassembly Instructions EEN 6 3 Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices EEN 6 4 Gleann EE 6 4 Repair and Replace me mts ici 6 5 Performance Checks A e A E EE 6 5 Environmental CONIMION Si dutta teddies ed 6 5 Warm Up PErio DEE 6 5 Initial Instrument Setting sacs cess eek sven a dad 6 6 Recommended Test EQUIP dd 6 6 Performance Check Procedures AAA 6 6 Fr queney AGCUPACY eege Eeer Eege eege 6 7 AM PITTS ACEULACY id 6 8 OMS CG UC ye eA A EE EE 6 8 Square Wave e EE 6 9 Sine Wave Characters did tala 6 10 Sine Wave Distortion is li 6 10 Sine wave Spectral Putty 6 11 Trigger OPEN di 6 12 Trigger Gate ET 6 12 Trigger Slope ev drid 6 12 A O 6 13 I
95. The active channel is displayed at the upper right corner of the LCD display When the display shows at the upper right corner you are currently programming channel 1 parameters Keypads 1 and 2 are used as hot keys for channel selection While not editing any parameter press key 2 to program channel 2 parameters When the display shows at the upper right corner you can proceed with channel 2 programming The amplitude and offset parameters are duplicated in multiple screens however when changed for a specific function shape the new value is updated on all screens for all other function shapes Refer to Figure 3 8 and modify amplitude and offset using the procedure as described below The index numbers in Figure 3 8 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Amplitude soft key button Press Enter to edit the Amplitude value Use the numeric keypad to program the new value Press m for mV or x1 for volts to select the suffix letter Press Enter to lock in the value ST eS Alternately you can modify the amplitude value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter Offset is programmed the same way as amplitude except select Offset from the soft key menus to access the offset parameter e Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the amplitude or offset parameters the output is updated immediately as soon as yo
96. This command will set the marker sample clock frequency for the sweep mode e lt mark_sclk gt will set the marker sample clock frequency Parameter type Numeric 5 30 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter range lt mark_sclk gt 100e 3 to 50e6 in units of samples per second SWEep MARKer Response and default The 5062 will return the present sweep sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 32e6 VOLTage lt ampl gt MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command programs the peak to peak amplitude of the output waveform The amplitude is calibrated when the source impedance is 500 e lt ampl gt sets the amplitude e lt MINimum gt sets the amplitude to its lowest value e lt MAXimums gt sets the amplitude to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 in units of volts lt MINimum gt 10e 3 in units of volts lt MAXimum gt 10 in units of volts VOLTage Response to query version The 5062 will return the present amplitude value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 5 VOLTage OFFSet lt offs gt Purpose This command programs the amplitude offset of the output waveform The offset is calibrated when the source i
97. User Manual Models 5061 5062 50 MS s Single Dual Arbitrary Waveform Generators Publication No 050601 Tabor Electronics Ltd Tabor Electronics Ltd P O Box 404 Tel Hanan Israel 20302 Tel 972 4 821 3393 FAX 972 4 821 3388 PUBLICATION DATE June 1 2005 Copyright 2005 by Tabor Electronics Ltd Printed in Israel All rights reserved This book or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form without written permission of the publisher WARRANTY STATEMENT Products sold by Tabor Electronics Ltd are warranted to be free from defects in workmanship or materials Tabor Electronics Ltd will at its option either repair or replace any hardware products which prove to be de fective during the warranty period You are a valued customer Our mission is to make any necessary repairs in a reliable and timely manner Duration of Warranty The warranty period for this Tabor Electronics Ltd hardware is three years except software and firmware products designed for use with Tabor Electronics Ltd Hardware is warranted not to fail to execute its pro gramming instructions due to defect in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of delivery to the initial end user Return of Product Authorization is required from Tabor Electronics before you send us your product for service or calibration Call your nearest Tabor Electronics support facility A list is located on the last page of this manual If you
98. Waveform generation and editing and 3 FM waveform generation and editing These operating options are described in this chapter however you must install AroConnection before you can use it The next paragraphs describe installation and first steps before going into in depth operation The installation program installs AroConnection on a logical drive of your choice The default is drive C It automatically creates a new directory and copies the files that are required to run the program Before you install AroConnection make sure that there is at least 10 megabytes of available memory on your hard disk drive To install AroConnection insert the distribution disk in the A drive Invoke Run and type A Setup The install program does the complete job far you and creates a workgroup and icons to start ArbConnection 4 3 5061 5062 User Manual Quitting ArbConnection For the New and Advanced Users Conventions Used in This Manual 4 4 Before you start roaming through menus and editing commands we strongly recommend that you make yourself familiar with ArbConnection basics and concept For now quit the program and spend some more time with this section of the manual Point the mouse cursor to the File menu and press the left mouse button Move the mouse cursor to the Exit command and press the left mouse button For the New User Learning to use ArbConnection is easy intuitive and quick even if you have never used such pr
99. a CD that includes the User Manual ArbConnection and IVI engine and driver Power cord and synchronization cable are also supplied as standard USB and Ethernet cables are available upon request Instrument specifications are listed in Appendix A These specifications are the performance standards or limits against which the instrument is tested Specifications apply under the following conditions output terminated into 50Q after 30 minutes of warm up time and within a temperature range of 20 C to 30 C Specifications outside this range are degraded by 0 1 per C A detailed functional description is given in the following paragraphs The description is divided into logical groups front and rear panel connectors operating modes output type output state filters synchronization and front panel indicators 1 9 5061 5062 User Manual Front Panel Connectors Channel 1 Output Channel 2 Output SYNC Output Front Panel Indicators Front Panel Controls The 5062 has 3 BNC connectors on its front panel one main output for each channel and one SYNC output These connectors are described below The channel 1 output connector outputs fixed standard waveforms to 25MHz user arbitrary and sequenced waveforms with sampling clock to 50MS s Output impedance is 500 that is the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 50Q Output amplitude accuracy is calibrated when connected to a 500 load The output amp
100. a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be Run Mode requested to correct your setting The Run Mode group provides access to the various trigger options of the modulation functions Note that the run modes that are shown on this panel behave differently than the Main Panel run modes For example if you place the instrument in triggered FM the instrument will idle on the carrier frequency and execute one FM cycle when triggered Refer to the appropriate section in this manual to learn Trig Slope more about triggered FM The Trig Slope group let you select edge sensitivity for the trigger input of the 5062 If you click on Pos the instrument will trigger on the rising edge of the trigger signal Likewise if you click on Neg the instrument will trigger on the falling edge of the trigger signal FSK The FSK group contains parameters for controlling the FSK function To turn the FSK function on and off click on the State button in this gro
101. able purchase replacement materials 2 Be sure the carton is well sealed with strong tape or metal straps 3 Mark the carton with the model and serial number If it is to be shipped show sending and return address on two sides of the box B NOTE If the instrument is to be shipped to Tabor Electronics for calibration or repair attach a tag to the instrument identifying the owner Note the problem symptoms and service or repair desired Record the model and serial number of the instrument Show the RMA Returned Materials Authorization order as well as the date and method of shipment ALWAYS OBTAIN AN RMA NUMBER FROM THE FACTORY BEFORE SHIPPING THE 5062 TO TABOR ELECTRONICS Preparation for use includes removing the instrument from the container box installing the software and connecting the cables to its input and output connectors If this instrument is intended to be installed in a rack it must be installed in a way that clears air passage to its cooling fans For inspection and normal bench operation place the instrument on the bench in such a way that will clear any obstructions to its rear fan to ensure proper airflow A CAUTION Using the 5062 without proper airflow will result in damage to the instrument 2 5 5061 5062 User Manual Installing Software Utilities Controlling the Instrument from Remote Connecting to a Remote interface 2 6 The 5062 is supplied with a CD that contains the following
102. agraphs 3 15 5061 5062 User Manual i PROGRAM ON OFF CEA SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 CHI cH2 loutput sync Burst BASE MODE E Dooe ae advance sre EH CICIR Slope Positive 8 Timer 10 000 00kHz 2 4 Burst Count Channel 1 Channel2 SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 RUN BURST POSITION amp Triggered Mode 3 16 Figure 3 9 Run Mode Options lay Note Burst run mode is shown in Figure 3 9 as an example however the following description applies to all Run Modes In general a specific run mode is selected from the Run Modes soft key menu The screen as shown in Figure 3 9 is displayed Proceed to select the run mode and to program parameters as follows 1 Press one of the soft keys to select from Continuous Triggered Gated or burst The output will immediately be updated with the selected run mode 2 Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll down to the parameter field you want to modify Press Enter to edit the Divider value Use the arrow keys or the dial to modify the edited parameter 5 Press Enter to lock in the value e In Triggered mode the output remains at a zero DC level as long as the trigger signal to the rear panel remains inactive The trigger input is sensitive to either a rising edge or a falling edge of a trigger signal Each time a transition occurs at the trigger input the 5062 generates one complete output waveform At the end of the out
103. amming Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will set the edge sensitivity for the trigger input lt POSitive gt will set the positive edge e lt NEGative gt will set the negative edge Parameter type Discrete TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 5062 will return POS or NEG depending on the present trigger setting Default value is POS TRIGger SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command will set the advance source for the trigger mode e lt EXTernal gt will select the external input e lt INTernal gt will select the internal trigger generator Parameter type Discrete TRIGger SOURce ADVance Response and default The 5062 will return EXT or INT depending on the present trigger source setting Default value is INT TRIGger TlMer lt interval gt Purpose This command will set the period for the internal trigger generator e lt interval gt will set the timer of the internal trigger generator Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt interval gt 100e 3 to 2e6 in units of Hz TRIGger TlMer Response and default The 5062 will return the present internal trigger timer value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 5 45 5061 5062 User Manual TRIGger IMMediate Purpose This command will stimulate the 5062 output once This co
104. apter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 channel 1 amplitude setting to 50mV and frequency to 1MHz 2 Modify the DMM setting DCV 100mV and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable 3 Adjust RV2 OFFS COMP1 for a DMM reading of OV 10mV 6 27 5061 5062 User Manual Channel 2 Amplitude and Balance Adjustment Channel 2 Offset Fine Adjustment 6 28 Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 frequency setting to 1kHz and channel 2 amplitude to 3 161V 2 Modify the DMM setting ACV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable 3 Note and record the DMM reading 4 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 3 162V 5 Adjust RV3 LIN2 fora DMM reading as was recorded in step 3 10mV 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for a few times until the reading is balanced to within 10mV 7 Modify the DMM setting to DCV 8 Modify 5062 frequency to 10kHz Repeat the sequence above but this time measuring DC voltage and adjust RV6 ZERO CH2 until you balance the readings between the two amplitude settings to within 10mV 9 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 1V 10 Modify 5062 frequency to 1MHz Adjust RV10 NULL2 for a DMM reading of 0 V 2mV 11 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 10V 12 Modify DM
105. arameters that are available in this box Start Point Anchor Defines the first point where the created wave will start Note that if you change the start point the left anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected start point The example shows start point set at point 200 End Point Anchor Defines where the created waveform will end Note that as you change the end point the right anchor will automatically adjust itself to the selected end point The example shows end point set at point 499 Max Peak Deviation This parameter defines the forward peak deviation Note that the forward peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to provide sufficient range for the forward peak deviation range ArbConnection 4 ra FM Wave Composer gt C Program Files Huke ArbExplorer Mot FmDet wyt 0 SMES SEY AMIE MMe da cam L Anchor 200 Sine Wave Anchor Start pts 200 End pts 499 Figure 4 22 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer Min Peak Deviation This parameter defines the backwards peak deviation Note that the backwards peak deviation cannot exceed the pre defined Deviation parameter as shown on the Toolbar In case you need to exceed the pre defined peak value you must quit this box and modify the Deviation parameter to p
106. arbitrary waveforms e lt fall gt sets the fall time parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 in units of percent RAMP TRANsition TRAiling Response and default The 5062 will return the present fall time value Default value is 30 SINC NCYCleN_cycles gt Purpose This command programs the number of 0 crossings of the standard SINC pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt N_cycle gt sets the number of zero crossings parameter Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt N_cycle gt 4 to 100 zero crossings SINC NCYCle Response and default The 5062 will return the present number of zero crossing value Default value is 10 GAUSsian EXPonent lt exp gt Purpose This command programs the exponent for the standard gaussian pulse waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt exp gt sets the exponent parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt exp gt 10 to 200 5 35 5061 5062 User Manual GAUSsian EXPonent Response and default The 5062 will return the present exponent value Default value is 20 EXPonential EXPonent lt exp gt Purpose This command programs the exponent for the standard exponential waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt exp gt sets the exponent parameter Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt exp gt 100 to 100 EXPonential EXPonent
107. are unsure where to call contact Tabor Electronics Ltd Tel Hanan Israel at 972 4 821 3393 or via fax at 972 4 821 3388 We can be reached at support tabor co il Limitation of Warranty Tabor Electronics Ltd shall be released from all obligations under this warranty in the event repairs or modifi cations are made by persons other than authorized Tabor Electronics service personnel or without the written consent of Tabor Electronics Tabor Electronics Ltd expressly disclaims any liability to its customers dealers and representatives and to users of its product and to any other person or persons for special or consequential damages of any kind and from any cause whatsoever arising out of or in any way connected with the manufacture sale handling repair maintenance replacement or use of said products Representations and warranties made by any person including dealers and representatives of Tabor Elec tronics Ltd which are inconsistent or in conflict with the terms of this warranty including but not limited to the limitations of the liability of Tabor Electronics Ltd as set forth above shall not be binding upon Tabor Elec tronics Ltd unless reduced to writing and approved by an officer of Tabor Electronics Ltd Except as stated above Tabor Electronics Ltd makes no warranty express or implied either in fact or by operation of law statutory or otherwise and except to the extent stated above Tabor Electronics Ltd shall hav
108. ared when power is shut off or after a device clear has been executed Chapter 6 Maintenance and Performance Checks Title Page What s in This Chapter oooooocccccnccccooocconcccnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnninnns 6 3 Disassembly EE eege eege eege dect 6 3 Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices eee eter teeter eeeeeeeeeeeees 6 4 GIGGING EE 6 4 Repair and Replacement cccccccccacceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeneeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeageeeeeeaaaas 6 5 Performance Ce ck A 6 5 Environmental Condition Sreser a e a a aa aa iaaea a 6 5 Warm up Period NEUENS NEUENS tivee ne wiiaeciis ENEE wise iiia wee 6 5 Initial ASTURIAS a os es a 6 6 Recommended Test Equipment sssnassssssssssossrnrrtrtttersrtnnrttttttrsrtnnnttttterernnntttrreeenrnnn teene 6 6 Performance Check Procedures oooocccccooooooccccnccccnononnnonononnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnncnnnonnnananinnss 6 6 Frequency Accuracy bt Eege Eege ENEE ENEE eege 6 7 APMP MUG NCCULAGY 22 5 605 ache seen ts Yar aa aA hn a AAAA eiat ak 6 8 Off e ACCURACY tc li elo e tee tas 6 8 Square wave Charachertstice nennt 6 9 Sine Wave Characteristics cccccceeeeceeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaeeeeesesaaeaeeees 6 10 Sine Wave Distortion ccccccceeeeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaneeees 6 10 SING wave Spectral PUNY i encecttectctcerccceusttehed cevecceuchtectsnceccanechveadeacelatetancteetesatnaet
109. ase so Power 3 Figure 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built in Library The Toolbar The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an active channel and for adjusting segment length and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 19 For the individual icons refer to the descriptions above of the Wave Composer Menus O ae es The Waveform Screen Figure 4 19 The Toolbar Icons Waveforms are created and edited on the waveform screen Figure 4 20 shows an example of a waveform created using the equation editor and the anchors to limit generation of the waveform between points 100 and 900 The various elements of the waveform screen are described below The waveform screen has two axes vertical and horizontal Both axes are divided into points The vertical axis is labeled from 8191 through 8192 for a total of 16 384 point This number represents 14 bits of vertical resolution 4 37 5061 5062 User Manual 4 38 I ong Wave Composer File Edit View D and cannot be changed because it is critical to the range of which the 5062 operates The horizontal axis by default has 1000 points from point O to 999 This number can be changed using the Wave Length field in the Toolbar The maximum length depends on the option installed in your instrument The wave composer will let you define the horizontal axis to a maximum of 1M words
110. at the output frequency is equal to the sample clock frequency divided by the number of points the start sample clock must be programmed to be 10kS s 10k 100 100Hz 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type Sweep Make sure the Carrier shows Arb If the carrier waveform is showing Std backup to the Top menu and select the Arbitrary waveform option 2 Press Start Sample Clk soft key and program the value to 10ks s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Now it is time to check if the number of points will not conflict at the stop frequency We can check this by dividing the maximum possible sample frequency by the number of points from the above calculations Fstop_max 50MS s 100Pts 500kHz In this case we should be safe because we plan to sweep to 25kHz only 4 Now we have to compute the sample clock frequency at the stop point Knowing already the number of points we have in this waveform the sample clock frequency at the stop point is computed using the following equation Fstop 100Pts x 25KHz 2 5MS s 5 Press Stop Sample Clk soft key and program the value to 2 5Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 6 Select and press the Sweep Time soft key and program the sweep time parameter to 10ns Press Enter to lock in the new parameter value If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate linearly swe
111. at the DDS control The DDS has an Waveforms extremely wide dynamic range with excellent linearity throughout the complete range The properties of the DDS are passed on directly to the output therefore the frequency is modulated within an extremely wide band without loosing linearity For example the 5062 can sweep linearly from minimum to its maximum frequency whereas similar instruments that use the standard VCO design can sweep through 3 decades only The 5062 has the following modulation options FM FSK Ramped FSK Sweep and AM These functions are described below Modulated waveforms are selected from the waveforms menu Figure 3 22 shows how to select the FM To access this menu press TOP then waveforms and select the Modulated waveforms option Modulation type is selected from the Modulation Type menu Refer to Figure 3 22 and use the following procedure to select the modulation type 1 Press on the Modulation Type soft key The following options will display AM FM FSK and Sweep 2 Using the dial or the up and down arrow keypad scroll down to the desired option 3 Press Enter to lock in the selected modulation type The output will be updated immediately after you press the Enter button 3 33 5061 5062 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR 4145062 oun ou foureur sync amp JI 1 R m Saal JCI 2 EA SINE S Deviation BASE MODE SYNC OUT RUN CONT POSITION Fig
112. ation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 5062 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FM ON Modulating Wave Arbitrary Sync On Output On 5 Using ArbConnection open the FM Composer and download the following waveform Wavelength 1000 points Waveform Sine wave Deviation 36MS s Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Period 1ms Max A 1 5625MHz Min A 437 5kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 22 Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics AM Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connectthe function generator SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the function generator as follows Waveform Sine wave Frequency
113. ave Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes 4 32 ArbConnection 4 The Wave Composer Edit Commande The Edit commands are used for manipulating the waveform that is drawn on the screen The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Autoline The Autoline command lets you draw straight line segments To draw a line the left mouse button at the start point Click again at the next point and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Sketch The Sketch command lets you draw free hand segments To draw a line using this command click and hold the left mouse button at the start point Release the mouse button when you want to stop and then click on the right mouse button to terminate this operation Smooth The Smooth command lets you smooth out rough transitions on your waveform This is done mathematically by multiplying waveform coordinates by the non linear portion of a cubic parabola The Smooth operation is done on segments of the waveform that are bound by anchors Anchor operation is described later in this chapter Place the anchors on the left and right of your waveform segment and select the Smooth command The waveform will change its shape immediately to follow the mathematical pattern of a parabolic curve Note that small segments
114. aveforms to the 5062 You may use Tabor Electronics or any other application to create waveform segments Then you can build your sequence table An example of how sequenced waveforms work with three different waveforms is demonstrated in Chapter 1 Figures 1 8 through 1 11 The sequence table as shown in Figure 3 18 specifies Link Seg Loops and Adv Description of the various elements within the sequence table is given below Link This parameter defines an index array for the sequence generator When generating sequences the instrument steps though the link in descending order therefore make sure that you enter your waveform segments in exactly the order you would like them at the output Seg This parameter associates waveform segments with links You can use different segments for different links or you can use 3 27 5061 5062 User Manual 3 28 the same segment for a number of links There are no limitations how you associate links to segments except you can not program in the sequence table segments that were not defined earlier Loops This parameter define how many times the segment will loop for the selected link For example if you program 2 the waveform will cycle twice through the same segment before transitioning to the next link Adv This field is a special code that is used in conjunction with the mixed advance mode This bit flags the 5062 if the selected link is continuous or stepped Informa
115. ax defines the positive peak of the vertical axis Min defines the negative peak of the vertical axis Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many waveform cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points Level Adjuster The Level Adjuster is a convenient tool that helps you adjust the amplitude and offset without modifying your equation The Level Adjuster mode does not interfere with your calculations and displays the waveform as computed from your equation The only difference is that your final calculations are stretched or shrunk or offset on the vertical scale to fit the new amplitude and offset boundaries For example look at the equation that is shown in Figure 4 23 This equation will generate the waveform as shown in Figure 4 20 If you change the Max and Min setting in the Waveform Amplitude fields and press the Adjust key your waveform will offset immediately without changing the equation The same way you can also change amplitude only or both amplitude and offset If you check the Manual option you ll have to click on the Adjust button for the Waveform Amplitude parameters to take effect The Adjust button name will change to Restore and back to Adjust if you click on it again If you check the Auto option your waveform will be created automatically with the new Amplitude setting Equation The Equation group has four buttons and the equation field You will be using the Equation field for w
116. ay 1000 inser E SS Insert C Program Files Fluke Wave_2 way 240 Delete C Program Files Fluke Wave_3 way 240 Delete CA AArbExplorer MotiPulsSing1 0 88 1 1 1 0 Channel 1 Channel d I Download Selection All Waveform Shape lt segment 1 gt Save Clear Mer Close Figure 4 7 The Waveform Studio Y TIP Point and click on one of the segments to show its shape in the Waveform Shape window Description of the various buttons in the Segment Table is given below Append adds segment number at the end of the table Insert adds a segment above a highlighted segment line Delete removes a highlighted segment Channel 1 shows segment table for channel 1 only Channel 2 shows segment table for channel 2 only Save saves current table settings Download Selection downloads a highlighted segment only to the 5062 memory Download All downloads the complete table to the 5062 The Sequence Table ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels memory Clear Mem wipes out the entire memory and clears the table for fresh settings Close removes the Waveform Studio from the screen If you have not saved your work the table setting will be lost As was explained in the above the waveform memory can be divided into smaller segments and up to 2048 segments can be defined and used as individual arbitrary waveforms Having a limited size of waveform me
117. b button to edit the Section Structure fields Use Append to add an index line at the end of the list Use insert to add a segment above a focused line ArbConnection 4 GE ieu section 1 y e F om ch W Pulse Editor Section 1 lt DC Intervals gt Section Structure 31 r Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals Time Level Points Gu Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 0 ms Repeat 2 Soo Duration xB 14 ms d Vertical Scale 10 V 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 14ms 1 4ms Div Figure 4 38 Building Section 1 of the Pulse Example Before we proceed with the design of the next section pay attention to some values that are now available on the composer screen On the left bottom corner of the composer Vertical Scale is showing 10V 1 25V Div and Horizontal Scale is showing 14ms 1 4ms Div These two values are critical for the integrity of the design because they are later being interpreted by the program and converted to waveform coordinates that the generator can process and output as a pulse shape These values may change as you add more sections to the pulse train Pulse Example The first pulse section is complete We are ready now to start Section 2 building the second section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 34 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new secti
118. byte lt gt high byte Control Bits O Figure 5 4 Ox1F59 Data Point Representation TRACe DEFine lt segment_number gt lt length gt Purpose This command will define waveform segments and their relative length Note that if you are using the TRAC DATA header to download waveform data there is no need for this command because the header contains segment size information and therefore the segment will resize automatically The use of this command is absolutely a must if you truncate waveforms and download to the instrument as one waveform e lt segment_number gt will set the selected segment e lt length gt will assign length to the above selected segment Minimum segment length is 16 points the maximum is limited by the memory size 1M lay Note The 5062 operates in interlaced mode where four memory cells generate one byte of data Therefore segment size can be programmed in numbers evenly divisible by four only For example 2096 bytes is an acceptable length for a binary block 2002 is not a multiple of 4 therefore the generator will generate an error message if this segment length is used TRACe DELete lt segment_number gt Purpose This command will delete a segment The memory space that is being freed will be available for new waveforms as long as the new waveform will be equal or smaller in size to the deleted segment If the deleted segment is the last segment then the size of another waveform written to the same
119. can be a time consuming task especially if all 1 Meg points are loaded in one shot The 5062 utilizes a DMA direct memory access concept that speeds data transfer from host computer to the instrument In this mode the memory bank is disconnected from the CPU circuit and re routed to the remote bus for direct memory accessing by the host computer The sequence generator is a powerful tool that lets you link and loop segments in any way you desire As a simple example of a sequenced waveform look at Figures 1 8 through 1 10 The waveforms shown in these figures were placed in memory Getting Started 1 Functional Description segments 1 2 and 3 respectively The sequence generator takes these three waveforms links and loops them in a predefined order to generate the waveform shown in Figure 1 11 The sequence circuit is useful for generating long waveforms with repeated sections The repeated waveform has to be programmed once and the repeater loops on this segment as many times as selected When in sequenced mode there is no loss of time between linked or looped segments Figure 1 9 Segment 2 Sine Waveform 5061 5062 User Manual ss 1024 eal 3 L Mictor 0 R rchor 10237 3261 Poht DO saes lt evenrtiin wee 13 Figure 1 10 Segment 3 Pulse Waveform The following sequence was made of segment 2 repeated twice segment 1 repeated four times and segment 3 repeated two t
120. cation in the search D Drivers e Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver you choose will be the best match for your hardware Figure 2 8 Choose Your Search and installation Options Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for E USB Serial Port es Click Finish to close the wizard Figure 2 9 New Hardware Found and Software installed The process above detected a USB device and installed the software for it then it has assigned a Serial Port address to the USB post In fact this ends the process unless you want to verify that the drivers and the port are correctly assigned on your PC To make sure your USB port and the Tabor Electronics 5062 configured correctly compare your Device Manager to the example in Figure 2 10 ei Note Configuring your USB setting does not automatically select the USB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select Interface menu described on page 2 7 2 13 5061 5062 User Manual E Device Manager File Action Yiew Help gt P F 22RA RRA pi E Sai 3 UE E el e E Keyboards Mice and other pointing devices Modems Monitors Network adapters PCMC
121. ces A Specifications Current segment is sampled continuously External low TTL level programs carrier sample clock external high TTL level programs shifted sample clock frequency FSK operates in user shape arbitrary waveforms only 100mS s to 50MS s Rear panel Trigger input BNC Low level carrier sample clock High level hop frequency From 10MHz to DC Minimum 1 waveform cycle 50ns Same as FSK except carrier sample clock ramps to shifted frequency at a rate defined by the ramp time parameter External low TTL level programs carrier sample clock external high TTL level programs shifted frequency 10us to 1s 3 digits 0 1 Sample Clock sweeps continuously from start to stop at a rate defined by the sweep time More complex sweep modes and types can be generated using the FM mode in conjunction with the FM composer program Linear or logarithmic Up or down depending on the start and stop setting 100mS s to 50MS s 1 ms to 1000s 4 digits 0 1 Automatic triggered gated or software command Same as SYNC output Programmable for selected frequency Continuous waveform is generated Each input cycle generates a single output cycle External signal enables generator First output cycle synchronous with the active slope of the triggering signal Last cycle of output waveform always completed Preset number from 1 to 1M cycles stimulated by an external or manual trigger This mode is not available in SEQ mode An int
122. channel 1 as follows Reset Frequency As specified in Table 6 2 Waveform Square wave Amplitude 1V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Frequency Accuracy 10 00000Hz 100 0000Hz 1 000000kHz E 1ppm 10 00000kHz SS 2 Configure model 5062 to accept external 10MHz reference Make sure that the external reference accuracy is better than 1ppm 3 Perform Frequency Accuracy tests using Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10MHz Reference 10 00000MHz 0 1ppm 25 00000MHz 0 1ppm 6 7 5061 5062 User Manual Amplitude Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function ACV 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1KHz Amplitude As specified in Table 6 4 Output On Test Procedure 4 Perform amplitude Accuracy tests on both channels using Table 6 4 Table 6 4 Amplitude Accuracy DMM Reading 5062 Setting Error Limits 10 00V 3 534V 53 0mV 5 000V 1 000V 100 0mV 10 00mV Offset Accuracy Equipment DMM Preparation 1 Configure the DMM as follows Termination 50Q feedthrough at the DMM input Function DCV 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 output to the DMM input 3 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1MHz Amplitude 10mV
123. cking on the icon If you cannot The Opening find the icon on your desktop click on Start Programs and Screen ArbConnection The opening screen will show If you installed the program correctly your screen should look as shown in Figure 4 1 xi m Communications Setup Interface Startup Options Specify an Address GPIB Communicate Only Previous Session Setup USB Reset Instrument amp Panels Detect Automatically LAN C Work Offline Model List EE ETA WW lr Store mode and don t show this box at startup GPIB GPIBO 4 Remove Address Add Address Cancel Communicate I ArbConnection lt lt Tabor Electronics gt gt Untitled cad File View System Help Figure 4 1 Startup amp Communication Options The Startup amp Communication Options dialog box is displayed You can check the Store and don t show so next time you invoke ArbConnection this dialog box will not be displayed The purpose of this dialog box is to update the program in the way you intend to use it For example if you are using a GPIB device that has address 4 you can click on the Specify an Address option and type in the required address so the next time you use ArbConnection the program will automatically resume communication with the same address as was originally detected If you chose to hide this dialog box you can still access and change the options from the System command a
124. connector at the rear panel generates sine waves only This output is derived from the sample clock generator and therefore its output is directly proportional to the SCLK setting There are differences how you set up FSK operation for standard and arbitrary waveforms These are explained and examples given in the following paragraphs This example will show how to generate FSK modulation using the standard waveforms The carrier frequency will be set to 1MHz and the shifted frequency to 1 5MHz Wel monitor the FSK modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector 1 Select a standard waveform from the standard waveforms and press the Frequency button Modify the frequency setting to display 1 000000MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 32 00000MS s In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the SCLK value and the number of points used for generating the current waveform In this case the number of points is computed from the relationship N SCLK Freq 32MS 1MHz 32 points 2 Now it becomes a bit tricky When generating standard waveforms the Model 5062 depending on the output frequency automatically sets the number of points and their associated sample clock In FSK mode only the sample clock hops between frequencies but the number
125. ction Properties The Section Properties contains a summary of properties that are unique for the current section Design Units Provide information on the units that are used when you draw the pulse segments These units can be changed in the pulse editor options Section Start Provides timing information for the start of the current section If this is the first pulse section the value will always be 0 Subsequent sections will show the start mark equal to the end mark of the previous section Repeat Allows multiplication of pulse segments without the need to re design repetitive parts After you enter a repeat value press the Apply button to lock in the repeat multiplier Duration Displays the time that will lapse from the start of the pulse section to the end The duration shows the total time lapse including the repeated sections Control Buttons The control buttons allow appending inserting and deleting one or all index lines The Undo button is useful in cases where an error was made and restoration of the last operation is critical Now that we are better familiar with the pulse editor and its options we are ready to start building the first section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 34 Point and click on the New icon and open the pulse editor Type in the level and time intervals as shown in Figure 4 38 Note that the pulse segments are being created on the screen as you type the values Y Tips Use the ta
126. d waveform modulation is generated continuously when the generator is placed in Continuous run mode however when placed in trigger burst or gate run modes the output generates continuous carrier waveform until a valid trigger signal is received If only one trigger is issued the 5062 generates a single modulation cycle and resumes to output continuous carrier waveform only Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the FM parameters The Modulation Type option will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Three examples are given in the following paragraphs to show you how to generate various FM modes This example will show how to generate frequency modulation using the standard waveforms and the Standard FM Mode The output frequency will be set to 1MHz Deviation Range to 100kHz and 100Hz sine as the modulating waveform We ll monitor the frequency modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start setting up the modulation parameters we need to get some information from the instrument Do the following Select the Sine waveform from the Standard Waveform library and then program the Frequency parameter to be 1MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 32MS s Note that in the standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms by the instrum
127. d arbitrary waveforms only Sequenced waveforms can not be used in burst mode The Burst run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 12 SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 Burst Parameters Advance Src Mie Slope Positive Timer 10 000 00kHz Triggered Burst Count Channel 1 Burst Channel 2 BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 RUN BURST POSITION Using the Instrument Selecting a Run Mode PROGRAM ON OFF CHI cH OUTPUT SYNC OO 3 DOE CICICIES po e ono MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG Ke o O Figure 3 12 Burst Run Mode Parameters Using the Arm The arm mode operates in conjunction with the continuous run Feature mode only This feature allows you to stop generating waveforms at a specific breakpoint location then continue generating the waveform only when you are ready and the waveform will resume operation from the last breakpoint position There are three parameters you can adjust for this function State Turns arm mode on and off Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input and Breakpoint Position Defines where the waveform will stop Note that each channel can be programmed to stop at a unique breakpoint position The Arm parameters are shown in Figure 3 13 3 19 5061 5062 User Manual PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 CHI ou OUTPUT SYNC IS S CICICIED E e o OOOA State RA OO el
128. d for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 42 Depp E Vertical Scale 10 1 25 V Div Horizontal Scale 78ms 7 6ms Div Current 3 View ku Train D Ki m Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals ry Time Level Points Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo i Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 42 8 ms Repeat 2 regele Duration x AJ 35 2 ms Figure 4 42 Building Section 5 of the Pulse Example 4 71 5061 5062 User Manual Downloading the Pulse Train Congratulations for coming that far If you followed the above description how to build this pulse example the screen should look exactly as shown in Figures 4 34 and 4 42 If you are happy with the results the next step is to download what you see on the pulse composer screen to the generator One more step before you download the waveform to the instrument is to check the Pulse Train Download Summary as appears after you press the Download icon You can also view the same information if you select it from the View menu Refer to Figure 4 43 for information how to interpret your download summary
129. d looped in user programmable order Sequenced waveforms are generated from waveforms stored in the 5062 as memory segments Therefore before a sequence can be used download waveform segments to the arbitrary memory using TRAC Information on how to partition the memory and how to download waveforms is given in the section entitled Generating Arbitrary Waveforms An example of how sequenced waveforms work is demonstrated in figure 1 8 through 1 11 The sequence generator lets you link and loop segments in user defined order Figure 1 11 shows a sequence of waveforms that were stored in three different memory segments There are a number of tools that you can use to build a sequence table The easiest way is of course to use the ArbConnection program Information how to use the ArbConnection program is given in a later chapter In other cases SCPI programming allows low level programming of sequence tables In general sequences can be build one step at a time using the SEQ DEF command The one step method is slow and tedious however it allows better control for one who just begins his first sequence programming Advanced users can download a complete sequence table using the binary sequence download option The later being much faster for applications requiring large sequence tables Use the information below to understand sequence commands and how to implement them in your application SEQuence lt header gt lt binary_block gt Purpose This c
130. die 1 10 A DI EE 1 10 Channel CEET cadet ta lic 1 10 SYNC EE 1 10 Front ER eer 1 10 Front Panel Controls ellas idas ac 1 10 Rear Panel Connectors ae eege 1 12 OR E 1 13 NA 1 13 SINE e tas ios 1 14 REF IN oia aa 1 14 JA ae Sat eet nec leary cB Sege 1 14 SAS IN BEE 1 14 Me eege Eege 1 14 AN EE 1 15 USB stas ii s 1 15 Grana 1 15 AC LINE iii 1 15 PRG S EE 1 15 5061 5062 User Manual Reuter 1 16 Be Ter We TEE 1 16 ale OG oa sas heat et ane EE 1 16 BUST MOG EE 1 16 Frequency AG UE 1 16 WEED EE 1 17 FS cs oe ca eee ce ela E at tae weet cat deele E 1 17 PRAM Gd ME 1 17 FM E 1 17 A E E E A EE TT T A 1 18 Standard Fixed Wavelonn EE 1 18 Arbitrary User WaveformS susi ie 1 18 Sequenced Waveforms AAA 1 18 Outp t EE 1 20 el 1 20 Programming MG UD 222 5501 sin EE 1 21 1 2 What s in This Chapter Introduction 5062 Feature Highlights Getting Started 1 What s in This Chapter This chapter contains a general description of the Model 5062 Universal Waveform Generator and an overall functional description of the instrument It lists and describes various options available for this model It also describes the front panel connectors and indicators This manual provides description of all features and options available with the instruments however some items described in the following paragraphs and chapters may not be installed in your instrument If you purchased Model 1071 ignore all references in this manual
131. download waveform data to the 5062 memory Waveform data is loaded to the 5062 using high speed binary transfer A special command is defined by IEEE STD 488 2 for this purpose High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data As an example the next command will download to the generator an arbitrary block of data of 1024 points TRACe 42048 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 2048 bytes of data 1024 waveform points into the active memory segment The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 4 designates the number of digits that follow 2048 is the even number of bytes to follow The generator accepts binary data as 14 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform For example 20000 bytes are required to download a waveform with 10000 points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 low byte binary high byte ASCII digit binary E non zero ASCII digit S E Start of Data Block Number of to Follow 2 Byts Per Byte Count Data Point 2 x Number of Points Figure 5 1 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data Format Trans
132. e BASE MODE Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels 3 50 JCI MI MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG FUNC MOD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 o ec Oo mz RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE e co CI Coy Gy A son VNC OUT ARM OFF Figure 3 27 AM Parameters The 5062 has two output channels that can generate various and numerous waveforms Although the control over waveform parameters is separate for each channel the sample clock is derived from a single source Having a single source for both channels is of great advantage because of two main reasons 1 There is no jitter between the two channels and 2 If we ignore the initial skew both waveforms start at exactly the same phase Understanding the initial skew term is very important If you set both channels to output square waveforms and then connect these signals to an oscilloscope If you then set the oscilloscope to its fastest time base setting you ll see the two rising edges of the 5062 signals They do not overlap because the instrument has a skew spec of 2 ns Skew is caused as a result of many factors Although the two channels were designed exactly the same small variations in printed circuit board layout or component values are enough to cause skew These factors were known during the design phase and were minimized as practical On the other hand skew can also be generated from external factors that are controlled by the user alone E
133. e FSK MODE Response and default The 5062 will return HOP or RAMP depending on its present setting Default is HOP FSK RAMP TIME lt time gt Purpose This command will set the time it takes for the sample clock frequency to ramp up and down from carrier to shifted frequencies and back This parameter will effect the 5062 only when the instrument is set to operate in ramped FSK mode lt time gt will set the ramp up and down time Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt time gt 10e 6 to 1 in units of seconds FSK RAMP TIME Response and default The 5062 will return the present ramp time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e 3 FUNCTion MODE FlXed USER SEQuence Purpose This command defines the type of waveform that will be available at the output connector e lt FIXed gt selects standard waveforms e lt USER gt selects arbitrary waveforms lt SEQuence gt selects sequenced waveforms Parameter type Discrete FUNCTion MODE Response and default The 5062 will return FIX USER or SEQ depending on the present 5062 setting Default value is FIX 5 27 5061 5062 User Manual FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC EXPonential GAUSsian NOISe DC Purpose This command defines the shape of waveform that will be available at the output connector This command has no affect
134. e and DC Arbitrary waveforms are generated by downloading data to memory Large waveform memories are provided so that multiple waveforms can be loaded at once Powerful sequencing allows the waveform segments to be generated in any order Communicating with the 5062 is done via ENET USB or GPIB The 5062 can operate from 0 C to 50 C Calibration should be performed under laboratory conditions having an ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less than 80 Turn on the power to the 5062 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the adjustment procedure If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Recommended equipment for calibration is listed in Table 6 12 Instruments other than those listed may be used only if their specifications equal or exceed the required minimal characteristics Also listed below are accessories required for calibration Table 6 13 Required Equipment Manufacturer Model Keithley 2000 Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 10MHz Reference Oscilloquarz 10MHz Counter Timer Tabor 6030 Accessories BNC to BNC cable 50Q Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter 6 24 500Q probe Initial Instrument Setting Adjustment Procedures DDS Duty Cycle Adjustment Sine Out Offset Adju
135. e with a lt new line gt character The IEEE STD 488 EOI message is a lt new line gt character Command string termination always resets the current SCPI command path to the root level The IEEE STD 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions like reset trigger and status operations Common commands begin with an asterisk are four to five characters in length and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below ARST SSIB LDN 5 5 5061 5062 User Manual SCPI Parameter Type 5 6 Numeric Parameters Discrete Parameters Boolean Parameters The SCPI language defines four different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages numeric discrete boolean and arbitrary block Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values for numeric parameters like MINimum and MAXimum are also accepted Engineering unit suffices with numeric parameters e g MHz or kHz can also be sent If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will ignore values which are not allowed and will generate an error message The following command is an example of a command that uses a numeric parameter
136. e 5062 via twisted pair Ethernet cable Take care that you use twisted pair wires designed for 10 100 BaseT network use phone cables will not work Refer interconnection issues to your network administrator After you connect the 5062 to the LAN port proceed to the LAN Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to set up LAN parameters The 5062 is supplied by the factory with the active remote interface set to USB If you intend to use USB connection then all you need to do is connect your USB cable and proceed with the USB Configuration instructions as given in this chapter to install the USB driver and to configure the USB port first connection only If you already used your instrument in various platforms and want to re select your interface To select an active Interface you need to access the Select Interface screen as shown in Figure 2 1 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The Select Interface soft key will update the display with the interface parameters Use the curser keys left and right to point to the required interface option then press Enter The new interface will Initialize and the 2 7 5061 5062 User Manual 2 8 icon at the top will be updated and will flag the active interface option The interface icon is always displayed at the top of the screen so if you are not s
137. e Composer gt E ne aloji File view Download About ed a in in Ceme E Fon ae a S o0 o o0 0m Figure 1 5 ArbConnection The Pulse Composer 1 6 Description Two Channels Output Functions Frequency Amplitude Run Modes Arbitrary Waveforms Getting Started 1 Description Detailed functional description is given following the general description of the features functions and options available with the 5062 The 5062 is a dual channel arbitrary waveform generator Although the two channels share a single sample clock source each channel can be controlled separately to generate different waveform amplitude and waveforms sequence Having a single sample clock source is an advantage in a dual channel configuration because it allows tight control over inter channel synchronization and leading edge start phase where the initial skew between the two channels is just a few nanoseconds Model 5062 is completely digital There are no analog functions resident in its hardware circuits Data has to be downloaded to the instrument for it to start generating waveforms The instrument can generate a few standard functions such as sine wave triangular wave and square wave Each time that a standard function is required the instrument calculates its coordinates and places them in the waveform memory Therefore every time a standard function is selected minimal ti
138. e NUN ede ONIN emos 4 64 Pulse Example Section Merire a ae E E E EEN OT ESE E E aE K SE ESN 4 66 Pulse Example SECION 2 o 4 67 Pulse Example Section TEE 4 69 Pulse Example Section A EE 4 70 Pulse Example SOCOM TT 4 71 Downloading the Pulse CT EE 4 72 Interpreting the Download Summary cccccccccccnnnnonancncnnncconannnnnnnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnncnnnnn 4 72 4 2 ArbConnection 4 What s in This Chapter What s in This Chapter Introduction to ArbConnection Installing ArbConnection This Chapter contains information how to install invoke and use ArbConnection Introduction to ArbConnection and examples how to program instrument controls and parameters and how to generate waveforms and download them to the 5062 are also given in the following sections In general AroConnection is a utility program that serves as an aid for programming the Model 5062 ArbConnection has many functions and features of which all of them share a common purpose controlling 5062 functions from remote As minimum to use ArbConnection you ll need the following tools 1 Computer Pentium Ill or better Windows 2000 XP or higher High resolution screen at least 1024 x 768 pixels Pointing device mouse or ball Visa 2 6 or higher installation A AS AO Last but not least some basic knowledge how to operate computers and Windows based programs ArbConnection operation is divided into three main functions 1 Front panel control 2
139. e SINusoid TRlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP SINC GAUSsian EXPonential NOISe DC SINusoid PHASe 0 0 360 TRlangle PHASe 0 0 360 SQUare DCYCle 50 1 99 PULSe DELay 10 0 99 9 WIDth 10 0 99 9 TRANsition LEADing 10 0 99 9 TRAiling 10 0 99 9 5 9 5061 5062 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes RAMP DELay 0 0 99 9 TRANsition LEADing 60 0 99 9 TRAiling 30 0 99 9 GAUSsian EXPonent 20 10 200 SINC NCYCle 10 4 100 EXPonential EXPonent 1 20 00 20 00 DC AMPLitude 100 100 100 EM DATA lt arbitrary_block gt DEViation 10e6 100e 3 50e6 FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER SHAPe SiNusoidal TRlangle SQUare RAMP FREQuency 1e3 1e 3 100e3 RASTer 1e6 1e 3 2e6 STATe OFF ON TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed SLOPe POSitive NEGative FSK FREQuency RASTer 40e6 100e 3 50 6 STATe OFF ON MODE HOP RAMP RAMP TIME 1e 3 10e 6 1 5 10 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and Styles Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes SWEep FREQuenc
140. e Subnet mask A code that helps the network device determine whether another device is on the same network or a different network e Gateway IP The IP address of a device that acts as a gateway which is a connection between two networks If your network does not have a gateway set this parameter to 0 0 0 0 2 15 506 1 5062 User Manual Choosing a Static IP For a Network Administered by a Network Administrator Address f you are adding the Ethernet device to an existing Ethernet network you must choose IP addresses carefully Contact your network administrator to obtain an appropriate static IP address for your Ethernet device Also have the network administrator assign the proper subnet mask and gateway IP For a Network without a Network Administrator If you are assembling your own small Ethernet network you can choose your own IP addresses The format of the IP addresses is determined by the subnet mask You should use the same subnet mask as the computer you are using with your Ethernet device If your subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the first three numbers in every IP address on the network must be the same If your subnet mask is 255 255 0 0 only the first two numbers in the IP addresses on the network must match For either subnet mask numbers between 1 and 254 are valid choices for the last number of the IP address Numbers between 0 and 255 are valid for the third number of the IP address but this number must be the same
141. e associated with these names The WAVE and FM buttons will open the waveform and FM waveform composers The first time you launch ArbConnection the opening screen will have the Main panel open Click on other buttons and interactively get the feel how ArbConnection opens and closes control panels ArbConnection s main purpose is controlling 5062 functions and parameters The 5062 can generate standard waveforms from a built in library arbitrary waveforms from user downloaded coordinates modulated waveforms digital patterns and much more The only way to access all of these features is through software utilities such as Plug 8 Play drivers and soft front panels ArbConnection is built to provide complete control over the 5062 ArbConnection has four main screens 1 Control panels 2 Waveform composer 3 FM composer and 4 Pulse Composer The various screens along with instructions how to access and use them are described below in detail The control panels look and feel just as if you would operate an instrument from its front panel They even look like instrument front panels so operating function and changing parameters is easy and intuitive Let s look at the first panel that shows at the opening screen This panel as shown in Figure 4 3 is called the Main Panel To begin with let s explore the panel controls to see how they feel react and what they do All other panels share almost the same feel so the description of how to o
142. e from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 7 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 6 20 Maintenance and Performance Checks Modulated Waveforms Characteristics Test Results Pass Fail FM Std Waveforms Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the 5062 SYNC output to the oscilloscope input chan 2 4 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Modulation Mode FM ON Deviation 30MS s Sync On Output On Test Procedure 1 Verify FM operation on the oscilloscope as follows Waveform Sine Period 1ms Max A 1 468MHz Min A 531kHz Test Results Pass Fail 2 Modify 5062 modulating waveform to triangle then square and ramp and verify FM waveforms as selected Test Results Pass Fail 3 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 4 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 21 5061 5062 User Manual FM Arb Waveforms Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package Prepar
143. e no liability under any warranty express or implied either in fact or by operation of law statutory or oth erwise PROPRIETARY NOTICE This document and the technical data herein disclosed are proprietary to Tabor Electronics and shall not without express written permission of Tabor Electronics be used in whole or in part to solicit quotations from a competitive source or used for manufacture by anyone other than Tabor Electronics The information herein has been developed at private expense and may only be used for operation and maintenance reference purposes or for purposes of engineering evaluation and incorporation into technical specifications and other documents which specify procurement of products from Tabor Elec tronics FOR YOUR SAFETY Before undertaking any troubleshooting maintenance or exploratory procedure read care fully the WARNINGS and CAUTION notices This equipment contains voltage hazardous to human life and safety and is capable of in flicting personal injury If this instrument is to be powered from the AC line mains through an autotransformer ensure the common connector is connected to the neutral earth pole of the power supply Before operating the unit ensure the conductor green wire is connected to the ground earth conductor of the power outlet Do not use a two conductor extension cord or a three prong two prong adapter This will defeat the protective feature of the third conductor in the
144. e segment 1 and automatically advance to segment 2 It will continue to generate segment 2 until a valid trigger is received After it has received a 5 55 5061 5062 User Manual trigger the generator will complete segment 2 and advance to segment 3 lt will continue to generate and loop segment 2 until a valid trigger is received After it has received a trigger the generator will complete 10 loops of segment 3 and will advance to segment 4 From segment 4 the generator will automatically advance to the beginning of the sequence and will repeat the above 3 Note Although trigger signals are used to advance mixed mode the mixed mode operates in continuous mode only The lt mode gt parameter will be ignored if you will use SING as advance mode for the sequence table Y Tip Every time you use the SEQ DEF command while your 5062 is in sequenced operating mode the instrument attempts to rebuild the sequence table and restart the sequence Therefore sending this command in sequenced mode will slow the programming process and the operation of the generator Using the SEQ DEF command in FIX or USER mode will greatly speed up programming time SEQuence DELete ALL Purpose This command will erase the sequence table 5 56 Remote Programming Reference SYSTem Subsystem 5 SYSTem The system related commands are not related directly to waveform generation but are an important part of operating the 5062 These Subsystem co
145. e termination of the FM Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Square will open a Square Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit square wave parameters The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below 4 39 5061 5062 User Manual 4 40 Figure 4 21 The FM Composer opening Screen ArbConnection 4 File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files Also use this command to exit the FM composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New Waveform The New Waveform command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use this command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open Waveform The Open Waveform command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer Save Waveform The Save Waveform command will store your active waveform in your 5062 directory as a binary file with a wvf extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save Waveform As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save Waveform As Use the
146. ecommunications industry require simulation of long waveforms without repeatable segments The only way to create such waveforms is having sufficient memory depth On the other hand if you do not need to use very long waveforms but must have many other waveforms stored in your working memory the 5062 lets you divide the memory bank to smaller segments and load different waveforms into each segment Downloading waveforms to the 5062 and managing arbitrary memory are explained in the programming section of this manual This section assumes that you have already downloaded waveforms and want the instrument to output these waveforms Refer to Figure 3 17 and use the following description to learn how to output arbitrary waveforms and how to program arbitrary waveform parameters To select Arbitrary waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms then Arbitrary The screen as shown in Figure 3 17 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequence Use the following procedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the arbitrary waveform function 1 Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the edit field 2 Punch in the value using the numeric keypad Be careful not to Using the Instrument 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms exceed parameter limits whi
147. ed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the T V keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new setting The Filter group lets you place filters at the output path There are two sets of filters one for each channel Click on 25MHz 50MHz or All to select both Click on Off to disable all filters Note that the 5062 is using the filters for generating the standard sine waveform and therefore if you pres the filter buttons when the 5062 is generating sinewave ArbConnection will prompt with an error message The Clock Source group allows selection of the reference for the internal clocks The reference source is important in applications requiring synchronization to larger system clocks The 10MHz is sourcing the entire instrument From this clock the instrument is generating the frequency for the standard waveforms and the sample clock for the arbitrary waveforms The 10MHz sub group provides selection between internal or external reference options Internal is the normal setting for the 5062 The internal reference has accuracy and stability of 1ppm An external reference input is provided for applications requiring better ArbConnection 4 The Command Editor accuracy and stability Click on the Internal button to select the Internal reference or the External button to activate the external reference input A WARNING By selectin
148. ed on the screen simply and efficiently in a special dialog box by typing in the width and level or by using the rubber band method to place straight line segments with the exact amplitude and time duration The pulse composer can also multiply pulse sections to create pulse duplication along lengthy time intervals When you finally have your pulse design on the screen the program determines if the pulse design will fit in one memory segment or use multiple segments and employ the sequence generator for repeatable segments In either case bear in mind that if you already have some waveforms stored in memory segments these will be erased to make room for the new pulse design If you insist on keeping arbitrary waveforms and still download complex pulses you can check the Force pulse to one segment option and the 5062 will do some extra muscle flexing to fit the pulse as required To launch the pulse composer point and click on the PULSE button in the Panels bar Figure 4 30 shows an example of the pulse composer The Pulse Composer has three main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 30 throughout the description of these sections The Pulse Composer The commands bar provides access to standard Windows Commands bar commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbExplorer specific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog b
149. eeeenaeeeneenaneaeeenaeeaeneeeeneeees 3 23 What Are Arbitrary Waveiomms AAA 3 24 Generating Arbitrary WaveforMS oocccccccccccccccccnnnnnennnnnenenenenenennnnnnnnnnnnninnnnnnninnnoss 3 24 Generating Sequenced Waveforms coccoocococircncrnccncorrnnrncnrranrncorenrnr cre rar nannnncananen s 3 26 What Are Sequenced Wavetormms ttnn teenn ennn 3 27 Editing the Sequence Table ocooocococccccccoccconenoccononnncnconenonnno nono ncnanncncanenacnanas 3 30 Selecting Sequence Advance Modes oocococicociononocinononinonenanenrrer 3 31 3 1 5061 5062 User Manual Generating Modulated Waveforms eeen eenen eenen EEEE E EEEE EEE Enn Ennn Enn Ennnnn nenna 3 33 PIM Modia O EN 3 34 Example 1 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Standard FM Mode 3 36 Example 2 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 37 Example 3 Modulating Arbitrary waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 40 A Eegeregie bn E centered 3 40 Example 1 FSK Using Standard Waveforms cccceeeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 42 Example 2 FSK Using Arbitrary Waveforms A 3 43 SEET eet Ehe Ee 3 44 Example 1 Generating Sweep Using Standard Waveforms eee 3 46 Example 2 Generating Sweep Using Arbitrary Waveforms A 3 48 AM A A O aL 3 49 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels ooooooocccccccccccncaaaancncnonononanananan ono nnnnnnnnnnnnnns 3 50 Synchronizing Multiple Instruments AAA 3 52 3 2 Overview Int
150. eg Optional 1 to 2048 16 points 4 All trace lengths must be multiples of 4 14 bits 16 384 points Through USB ENET or DMA channel through GPIB Sine wave performance is measured using the maximum sample clock rate at 5Vp p the maximum amplitude resolution of the DAC 14 bit and without filters Spectrum analyzer settings Start frequency OMHz stop frequency 50MHz Nyquist frequency 0 1 to 100 KHz lt 50dBc for carrier frequencies lt 1 MHz lt 40dBc for carrier frequencies lt 5MHz lt 35dBc for carrier frequencies lt 10MHz lt 22dBc for carrier frequencies lt 25MHz SEQUENCED ARBITRARY WAVEFORMS Operation Advance Modes Automatic Sequence Advance Stepped Sequence Advance Permits division of the memory bank into smaller segments Segments may be linked and repeated in user selectable fashion to generate extremely long waveforms No triggers required to step from one segment to the next Sequence is repeated continuously through a pre programmed sequence table Current segment is sampled continuously external trigger advances to next programmed segment Control input is TRIG IN connector A 5 5061 5062 User Manual Single Sequence Advance Mixed Sequence Advance Advance Source Sequencer steps Segment loops Segment Duration OUTPUTS Channels 1 and 2 Output Connector Stand by Impedance Protection Amplitude Range Resolution Accuracy 1 KHz Offset Offset Range Re
151. egment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next link If repeats were selected for a segment the loop counter is executed automatically Note although the trigger input controls advanced steps to use this mode the 5062 must be in continuous operating mode Single Using this advance mode the 5062 idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed The single advance mode requires that the 5062 be in trigger operating mode only An attempt to select the Single advance mode when the instrument is in continuous operating mode can not be done When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles 3 31 5061 5062 User Manual 3 32 MENU GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR 4145062 f ajajaj View Advance Mode E Sample Clock Amplitude BASE MODE at a DC level equal to the last point of the last generated waveform If loops were programmed the output will repeat this segment for n times automatically Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequence step to the next assigned link Note to use this mode the 5062 must be in triggered operating mode Mixed This sequence advance mode allows combination of automatic and stepped links in one sequence table To use this mode in the sequence table mark the Adv field 1 to flag stepped link or O for continuous link Then download the sequence table to the 5062 Note to use t
152. emove the cables from the front panel outputs and connect one cable to the rear panel SINE OUT connector 3 Change function shape to arbitrary and perform rear panel spectral purity tests using Table 6 10 Table 6 10 Rear Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test eck pen Reading Limits ron SCLK Freq Reading Limits Start Stop Rear Panel Out 5MHz gt 45dBc 6 11 5061 5062 User Manual Trigger Operation Trigger Gate and Equipment Oscilloscope function generator counter Burst Preparation 1 Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50Q feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 2 outputs to the oscilloscope input Place the feedthrough attenuator at the oscilloscope inputs 3 Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 1kHz Run Mode As required by the test Wave TTL level Square from the main output 4 Connect the function generator output to the 5062 TRIG IN connector 5 Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset Frequency 1 5625MHz Burst Count 10e6 counts each channel Internal Trigger 1ms Amplitude 5V Output On Test Procedure 1 Perform trigger and gate tests using Tables 6 11 2 Configure the counter to TOTB Measurements and perform burst tests using Tables 6 11 Table 6 11 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics 5062 Setting External Trigger Signal Oscilloscope Reading Triggered 1kHz TTL 20 ns width
153. en as shown in Figure 4 21 you ll see that the vertical axis is marked with frequencies You ll see later that as you draw waveforms on the FM composer screen these waveforms represent frequency changes and not amplitude changes as are generated by the waveform composer The FM Composer The FM composer is a great tool for controlling frequency agility by generating the agility curve as an arbitrary waveform For example if you create a sine waveform the 5062 will generate frequency modulated signal that will follow the sine pattern The resolution and accuracy of the modulated waveform is unsurpassed and can only be duplicated by mathematical simulation The FM composer is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create and download modulating waveforms to the 5062 using the FM Composer Invoke the FM Composer from Panels bar The Wave Composer has three sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 21 throughout the description of these parts The Commands bar The commands bar is exact duplication of the commands bar in the Wave Composer It provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediat
154. enerates Standard Arbitrary or Sequenced waveforms and removed from continuous run mode the output idles on a dc level until a valid trigger initiates an output cycle On the other hand when the 5062 generates a modulated waveform modulation is generated continuously when the generator is placed in Continuous run mode however when placed in trigger burst or gate run modes the output generates continuous carrier waveform until a valid trigger signal is received If only one trigger is issued the 5062 generates a single modulation cycle and resumes to output continuous carrier waveform only Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the Sweep parameters The Modulation Type option will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Two examples are given in the following paragraphs to show you how to sweep using standard waveforms and how to sweep arbitrary waveforms This example will show how to generate sweep modulation using the standard waveforms The start frequency will be set to 100Hz and the stop frequency to 25kHz We ll be using linear sweep in the down direction in 10ms We ll monitor the sweep modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector 1 Select a standard waveform from the standard waveforms and press the Frequency button Modify the frequency setting to Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms display 1 000000M
155. ent and cannot be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the number of points that the 5062 requires to generate 1MHz We can find this out from SCLK Frequency relationship 32M 1M 32 points Note this number It will be required later to compute the deviation range parameter We are now ready to proceed with programming the FM parameters Continue with the following procedure 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FM Note that the default modulating waveform is Sine Leave this option as is for now Later you can practice modifying the modulating waveform to other shapes 2 Select the Freq parameter This parameter sets the frequency of the modulating waveform There is no need to compute and convert this parameter because the frequency is given in units of Hz Use the cursor to point to the digit you want to change and rotate the dial to adjust the modulating frequency to 100Hz 3 Select the Sample Clk deviation parameter This parameter sets the deviation range value Remember that we computed the number of points that the 5062 is using for generating 1MHz We need to use this number to program the deviation range We want the front panel output to deviate by 100kHz 50kHz above and 50kHz below the carrier frequency Since the deviation range is controlling sample clock the value that you have to put on the display is 100kHz x 3
156. ents you must connect the synchronization cable between the master and the slave units The hardware connection is shown in Chapter 3 The list of Group to Synchronize instruments must be arranged in the same order as you connected the synchronizing cables Make sure that the last slave has the special termination connector attached to the cable When you finally have your list arranged in the right order you can apply the setting to all instruments by pressing the Apply button You can also activate and deactivate the synchronization from this dialog box by pressing the Activate and Deactivate buttons These buttons are duplicates of the Utility buttons so you do not have to go back and forth between panels Phase offset between instruments is programmed in the Phase Ofst field for each instrument in the chain The X Ch group provides access to inter channel offset adjustment Offset is programmed in units of waveform points and therefore it is best utilized in arbitrary mode where the number of waveform points is known When offset is set to 0 the two channels will start at the same time and with the first transition exactly in the same phase The start phase of channel 2 can be programmed to have a different start position so phase between the channels will be proportional to the programmed start position of the second channel TO change the phase offset point and click on the Offset LED the value that is associated with Offset is display
157. equency divider parameter then 1 2 3 4 Using the dial scroll down to the Divider field Press Enter to edit the Divider value Use the numeric keypad to program the divider value Use integer number only Press Enter to lock in the value Alternately you can modify the sample clock frequency divider value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter ei Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the channel 2 sample clock frequency divider parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Output amplitude and offset can be programmed independently and separately for each channel Amplitude and offset are set within windows so before you select values for these parameters make sure you do not exceed the limits 3 13 5061 5062 User Manual 3 14 Offset for the 5062 can be adjusted with 6 digits of resolution nearly 19 bits and amplitude is programmed with 4 digits Amplitude and offset can be programmed independently as long as the following relationship between the two values is not exceeded Window E e Offset The first thing you do before you program amplitude and offset setting is define which of the channels is being programmed
158. er Channel Dependency Output Termination Input Output Protection Power On Reset Defaults Using the Instrument 3 Overview This chapter contains information about how to operate the Tabor Electronics 5062 Operation is divided into two general categories basic bench operation and remote operation GPIB USB and ENET Basic bench operation which is covered in this section describes how to use the arbitrary waveform generator using front panel sequences The 5062 is supplied with Tabor Electronics a PC based software package with a graphical user interface to allow users to program all of the functions directly LabView drivers and a set of SCPI commands are available for more experienced programmers The following paragraphs describe the various modes of operation and give examples of how to program the Model 5062 The manual is organized by instrument function and instructions are given in each paragraph on how to use the function from both the front panel and Tabor Electronics The 5062 has two output channels Although this is a two channel instrument many of the commands that set parameters and functions are common for both channels For example sample clock and run modes can not be set separately for each channel On the other hand you may set each channel to have different function shape amplitude and offset Table 3 1 lists the function and parameters and their related Inter channel dependency During use
159. ernal timer repeatedly generates a burst from 1 to 1M counted cycles This mode is not available in SEQ mode Front panel BNC TTL Positive or negative programmable 2MHz to DC 100mHz to 2MHz 7 digits 0 1 IEEE 488 2 command A 3 5061 5062 User Manual Trigger Start Phase Programmable Units Range Resolution Breakpoint Range Event to cause stop at breakpoint Waveform starts from point n and completes at point n 1 Waveform points 0 to 512k points 1 Meg Optional 4 points Waveform starts after trigger and stops at breakpoint position Each channel can be programmed with its unique breakpoints 0 to 512k points 1 Meg Optional SCPI command or valid stop signal at the TRIG input Event to cause start from breakpoint SCPI command or valid start signal at the TRIG input Breakpoint Error Start Stop Control Description Start Stop control System Delay Trigger to waveform output STANDARD WAVEFORMS A 4 Frequency Range Source Internal synthesizer Resolution Accuracy Stability Sine Frequency Range Band Flatness Programmable Parameters Triangle Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Square Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Pulse Ramp Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Delay Rise Time High Time Fall Time 4 points Valid signal at the Trigger input stops the waveform at a programmed breakpoint The Stop signal operates simultaneously on both channels Channel stop occurs
160. espond to the procedure steps in the following description 50 000 000 MHz de eg MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC UT ARM OFF TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 o z e o z POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE a Ea am O gt A A son son Figure 3 4 Selecting an Output Waveform Type 3 9 5061 5062 User Manual Changing the Output Frequency 3 10 Alternately the outputs can be turned on and off from the Outputs sub menu Use the following procedure to open the Outputs dialog box press to toggle output state 1 Press TOP to display the root menu 2 Press Waveforms the display as shown in Figure 3 4 will open 3 Press one of the soft keys to select the required waveform Note the waveform screen shows a sine waveform The sine is the default waveform After you select a different waveform type the screen will be updated with a new symbol which is associated with the new type ei Note The picture in the 5062 LCD display is an icon only The actual output waveform may look entirely different You should be careful not to confuse waveform frequency with sample clock frequency The waveform frequency parameter is valid for standard waveforms only and controls waveform frequency at the output connector The sample clock frequency parameter is valid for arbitrary and sequenced waveforms only and defines the frequency of which the generator clocks data points Standard waveform frequency is measured in units of H
161. essive TRAC commands will affect the selected segment The SYNC output will be assigned to the selected segment This behavior is especially important for sequence operation where multiple segments form a large sequence In this case you can synchronize external devices exactly to the segment of interest e lt segment_number gt will set the active waveform segment number Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt segment_number gt 1 to 2048 TRACe SELect Response The 5062 will return the active segment number SEGment lt header gt lt binary_block gt 5 51 5061 5062 User Manual Purpose This command will divide the waveform memory to smaller segments and will speed up memory segmentation The idea is that waveform segments can be built as one long waveform and then just use this command to split the waveform to the appropriate memory segments In this way there is no need to define and download waveforms to individual segments Using this command segment table data is loaded to the 5062 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for large number of segment As an example the next command will generate two segments with 12 bytes of data that contains start address and segment size information SEGment
162. et to gated mode the 5062 output remains at a DC level as long as the rear panel TRIG IN signal remains inactive The gating signal can be programmed to be either active high or active low The Model 5062 generates output waveforms as long as the proper level is present at the trigger input connector When the gate signal is de asserted the output completes the last cycle and resumes position at a DC level equal to the last point of the waveform There is only one parameter you can adjust for the gated mode Slope Defines if the generator is gating when the trigger signal is TTL high Positive or when the trigger signal is TTL low Negative Start Positions Defines the start point on the waveform for the gating signal The start position parameter may serve as a gate delay generator where the delay is set in number of waveform points 3 17 5061 5062 User Manual Burst Mode 3 18 Continuous Triggered Gated BASE MODE You may use the gated mode to gate standard waveforms arbitrary waveforms and sequences of waveforms The gated run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 11 PROGRAM ON OFF SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 CHI cH2 lourrur sync SE Homes y Advance Src ExT i g Slope ge ICH Timer 10 000 00kHz YO Start Positions 0 d EH D Q Channel 1 o DDE MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 11 o e o o RUN GATE POSITION
163. eturned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e6 FM TRIGger MODE CONTinuous TRIGered GATEd Purpose This command will select one of the FM modes e CONTinuous will select continuous modulation e TRIGered will select triggered modulation GATEd will select gated modulation Parameter type Discrete FM TRIGger MODE Response and default The 5062 will return CONT TRIG or GATE depending on its present setting Default is CONT FM TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will select slope sensitivity for the FM trigger input e POSitive will select rising edge NEGative will select falling edge Parameter type Discrete FM TRIGger SLOPe Response and default The 5062 will return POS or NEG depending on its present setting Default is POS 5 24 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem FREQuency lt freq gt MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command modifies the frequency of the standard waveform in units of hertz Hz It has no affect on arbitrary waveforms lt freq gt sets the waveform frequency e lt MINimum gt sets the waveform frequency to its lowest value e lt MAXimums gt sets the waveform frequency to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 FREQuency Response and default The 5062 will return the present frequency value The returned val
164. evel command that programs the 5062 to output sine waveform along with its associated parameters lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts 5 15 5061 5062 User Manual e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt phase gt sets the output start phase in units of degrees Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt phase gt 0 to 360 APPLy SINusoid Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 0 APPLy TRlangle lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output triangular waveform along with its associated parameters e lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt phase gt sets the output start phase in units of degrees Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt phase gt 0 to 360 APPLy TRlangle Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 0 APPLy SQUare lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt duty_cycle gt Purpose This c
165. eviation 3200000 X SZ R Anchor 9999 Start pts 10 End pts 9999 r Peak Deviation Max 67200000 Cancel Min 60800000 ok Wave Properties Power bh ml Cycles 1 Start Phase 0 9999 Prints Figure 3 24 Using Tabor Electronics to Generate Arbitrary Modulating Waveforms If you did not make any programming errors the front panel outputs will generate frequency modulated waveforms having carrier frequency of 2MHz deviation frequency of 100kHz and modulating frequency of 100Hz We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is around 1V into 50Q carrier frequency is 32MHz deviated 3 2MHz above and below the carrier frequency setting modulating waveform frequency is 100Hz 3 39 5061 5062 User Manual Example 3 Modulating Arbitrary waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode FSK 3 40 In Examples 1 and 2 above we showed you how to frequency modulate standard waveforms You can use these examples as guideline for modulating arbitrary waveforms Generating arbitrary waveforms was discussed earlier in this chapter so before you try modulating such waveforms make sure that you first familiarize yourself with the a
166. ext time you open this table it will have the same contents as you saved in your previous session The Trigger panel as shown in Figure 4 9 is invoked by pressing the TRIG button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Trigger Panel from the Panels menu the 5062 will not change its trigger mode To modify the instrument run mode use the Main Panel The trigger parameters and setting in the Trigger Panel will have an effect on the 5062 only if an appropriate run mode setting has been selected The functional groups in the Trigger Panel are described below Figure 4 9 The Trigger Panel The Trigger Parameters group provides access to trigger phase start and burst count To change trigger start phase or burst count point and click on one of these parameters The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels ei Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator
167. fer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF 0aH characters can be used as waveform data points and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary_block gt Represents waveform data The waveform data is made of 16 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 16 bit words and rearranged as two 8 bit words before it can be used by the 5062 as waveform data points The following description shows you how to prepare the data for downloading to the 5062 There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 5 48 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem 1 Each channel has its own waveform memory Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel before you download data to the generator Waveform data points have 14 bit values Data point range is 0 to 16 383 decimal Data point 0 to data point 16 383 corresponds to full scale amplitude setting For example if your amplitude setting is 5Vpk pk your generator will output waveforms from 2 5V to 2 5V The corresponding level in waveform points is decimal O 0x0000 for 2 5V and decimal 16 393 Ox3FFF for 2 5V Similarly the OV point will correspond to decimal 8191 0x1FFF 5 The two most significant bits D14 and D15 are contr
168. for service from Auxiliary Status registers can clear the entire Status Byte register Sending the CLS command to the device after a SCPI command terminator and before a Query clears the Standard Event Status Register and clears the output queue of any unread messages With the output queue empty the MAV summary message is set to FALSE Methods of clearing other auxiliary status registers are discussed in the following paragraphs The Service Request enable register is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding summary messages in the Status Byte Register Thus the application programmer can select reasons for the generator to issue a service request by altering the contents of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE common query The response to this query is a number that represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Service Request Enable Register The value of the unused bit 6 is always zero The Service Request Enable Register is written using the SRE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value of 1 indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending SREO The generator always ignores the value of bit 6 Summary of SRE commands is given in the following SREO Clears all bits in the register SRE1 Not used
169. function on and off click on the State button in this group The various controls in the FM group are described below Determines the shape of the modulating waveform There are two basic options Standard waveforms and Arbitrary waveforms If you do not need exotic waveforms you can use one of the built in standard wave shapes Sine Triangle Square and Ramp These waveforms can be adjusted for their frequency and deviation range On the other hand you can select the arbitrary modulating wave option where you can use any shape however you must load the modulating waveform from an external application such as the FM composer in ArbConnection Information on the standard and arbitrary FM functions is given in Chapter 3 Click on the button next to the required modulating waveform shape to select it ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Allow adjustment of the parameters that are associated with the modulating waveform Notice that the parameters are changing between standard and arbitrary waveforms To change the FM parameters point and click on the required parameter The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading Di Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to
170. g Box 4 28 5061 5062 User Manual 4 14 The Command POMO od al 4 30 4 15 The Wave Composer Opening Screen ENEE 4 31 4 16 The Open Waveform Dialog BOX EEN 4 32 4 17 Zooming In on Waveform SeGMeMs et a 4 36 4 18 Generating Distorted Sine waves from the built in Library oooconnnccnnnniccccnnnnncccconnnnccccnn 4 38 418 The Tel ert ICONS a aa a sien ede aa n a aeaa AA AEEA aay vad ade ecm Soe 4 38 4 20 The Waveform RE 4 39 4 21 The FM Composer opening Screen eege EE acest dea ee EENS eee 4 41 4 22 Generating Sine Modulation Using the FM Composer 4 44 4 23 The Equation Editor Dialog BOX EE 4 45 4 24 An Equation Editor En EE 4 50 4 25 Using the Equation Editor to Modulate Sine Waveforms csccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeees 4 51 4 26 Using the Equation Editor to Add Second Harmonic Distortion c ceeeceseeteeeeeeeeeees 4 52 4 27 Using the Equation Editor to Generate Exponentially Decaying Sinewave c cco 4 53 4 28 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal With Upper and Lower ele EE 4 54 4 29 Combining Waveforms into Equations oooooccccnnnccccccnonoccccnononconccnnnnancn ccoo n cnn rca nccn cnn 4 55 4 30 The Pulse Composer SO eds aonb Ee Ee 4 57 4 31 TING Pulso Editor uan Sege ENEE eeh EENS dE 4 59 4 32 The Pulse Editor Options acc cnssdec cans csecenns DEENEN Sepandagentesacens e coin 4 60 4 33 The Pulse Composer Toolbar ICONS ENEE 4 61 4 34 Complete Pulse Train Design
171. g an external reference you are disabling the internal reference circuit If you do not have a 10MHz reference connected to the instrument the 5062 will generate erroneous frequencies The SCLK sub group provides selection of internal or external reference for this clock The internal option is the default and is recommended for most applications If you select the external source for the SCLK signal you must connect a valid signal to the rear panel SCLK input Refer to Appendix A for information on valid System SCLK clock parameters Commands in this sub group will let you Reset the entire instrument to factory defaults and clear the error queue CLS if you made programming errors and want to remove the error list from the queue The Command Editor is an excellent tool for learning low level The Command programming of the 5062 Invoke the Command Editor from the Editor System menu at the top of the screen Dialog box as shown in Figure 4 14 will pop up If you press the Download button the function call in the Command field will be sent to the instrument x m Command Editor Command Add Error s query Vv voti 5 fteq 10 7e6 y Download Response Remove Line History Buffer Clear Import Export Download f Figure 4 14 The Command Editor 4 29 5061 5062 User Manual The Wave Composer The Commands bar 4 30 Low level SCPI commands and queries can be directly sent t
172. gainst temporary short to case ground BIT LCOM Point 0 to n Programmable with 4 point resolution Programmable 4 to 100000 waveform points 4 points Channel 1 Sinewave Output Description Connector Impedance Level Protection Source Frequency Range and Resolution Harmonics and Spurious Total Harmonic Distortion Harmonics and non related spurious to 50 MHz Appendices A Specifications An output that is directly derived from the sample clock generator and has an output frequency equal to the programmed sample clock frequency This output generates sine waveforms that corresponds to sample clock setting including modulated waveform such as FM sweep FSK and Ramped FSK Rear panel BNC 50Q 1 1V into 500 Protected against temporary short to case ground Sample clock frequency Same as Sample clock 0 05 to 100kHz lt 25dBc Multi Instrument Synchronization Connectors Description Interconnecting Cables SCLK Output Connector Level SCLK Input Connector Input Level Impedance Minimum Pulse Width Master Slave Connector INPUTS TRIG Input Connector Impedance Threshold Level Min Pulse Width Slope These connectors are used for synchronizing one master instrument to multiple slave units thereby creating a multi channel fully synchronized and jitter free system There are three connectors in this group which must be connected between the instruments to achieve synchronization SCLK output
173. generates sine waves only This output is derived from the sample clock generator and therefore its output is directly proportional to the SCLK setting There are differences how you set up sweep operation for standard and arbitrary waveforms These are explained and examples given in the following paragraphs Stop Sample Clik This parameter specifies where the sweep will stop Note that sweep stop does not necessarily have to have lower value than the sweep stop frequency If you define sweep stop frequency higher than the sweep start frequency then the generator will sweep up You can also reverse the direction of the sweep by using the sweep direction parameter Y Tips 1 In standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter and the number of waveform points are set automatically by the instrument and can not be modified directly During sweep modulation only the sample clock is changing but the number of waveform points remain constant Therefore computing the number of waveform points used by the instrument is critical to correct sweep operation For example if you set your start frequency at 50MHz the 5062 can use only two waveform points While the instrument can generate a fairly nice sine waveform at 50MHz by using just two points and special filters the same two points will look like square waveforms if the sample clock is reduced below 10MS s 2 As a reverse example if you sweep modulate the output from a start frequency
174. gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt exp gt sets the exponent value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt exp gt 10 to 200 APPLy GAUSsian Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 20 5061 5062 User Manual APPLy DC lt _ampl gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output DC level along with its associated parameter lt _ampl gt sets the output level as percentage of the amplitude setting Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt _ampl gt 100 to 100 in units of APPLy DC Response to query version The 5062 will return lt _ampl gt Default values are 100 APPLy USER lt seg gt lt sclk gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output user defined waveform along with its associated parameters e lt seg gt selects the active segment number e lt sclk gt sets the sample clock frequency in units of samples per second e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt seg gt 1 to 2048 lt sclk gt 100e 3 to 50e6
175. gt will set the sweep stop sample clock frequency for the sweep mode Parameter type Numeric 5 28 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter range lt stop_sclk gt 100e 3 to 50e6 in units of samples per second SWEep STOP Response and default The 5062 will return the present sweep stop sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 1kHz would be returned as 1E3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 20e6 SWEep TIME lt time gt Purpose This command will set the time it takes for the sample clock frequency to sweep from carrier to stop frequencies This parameter will effect the 5062 only when the instrument is set to operate in sweep mode e lt time gt will set the sweep time Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt time gt 1e 3 to 1000 in units of seconds SWEep TIME Response and default The 5062 will return the present sweep time value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 10ms would be returned as 10E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e 3 SWEep DIRection UP DOWN Purpose This command will select the sweep direction up and down e lt UP gt selects an up direction The sample clock will sweep from start frequency set by the sch parameter to stop frequency set by the stop sclk parameter e lt DOWN gt selects the down direction The sample clock will sweep from stop frequency
176. gure 3 30 and the following description to learn how to set 5062 instruments as master and slaves 1 Connect your instruments as shown in Figure 3 29 Make sure O O O O CB Using the Instrument Synchronizing Multiple Instruments you designate the first instrument in the chain as master Also make sure the last slave is terminated with the 9 pin terminator 2 Select the Utility menu and scroll down to the Multi Inst Sync option Press Enter and the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 30 will appear 3 By default all instruments are designated Master On the slave units only scroll down to the Synchronization Properties group and press Enter Use the arrow keys to select the Slave option and press Enter to lock in the new state 4 Finally on the master unit only scroll up to the Couple State between Instruments group and press Enter Use the arrow keys to select the Active state and press Enter to lock in the new state PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 ou ou foutrur sync JIC y Ee Couple state between instruments a C C E VW O Inactive orma Synchronization Properties C m Choose the role you want for the this instrument JI Ge O Slave Start Position To Back ES 0 0 MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF ag on ele A A Gy A Figure 3 30 Setting up Master Slave Parameters If you executed the above procedure correctly all slave units will
177. hat represents the sum of the binary weighted value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register is written using the ESE command followed by a decimal value representing the bit values of the Register A bit value one indicates an enabled condition Consequently a bit value of zero indicates a disabled condition The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared by setting ESEO Summary of ESE messages is given in the following ESEO No mask Clears all bits in the register ESE1 ESB on Operation Complete ESE2 ESB on Request Control ESE4 ESB on Query Error ESE8 ESB on Device Dependent Error ESE16 ESB on Execution Error ESE32 ESB on Command Error ESE64 ESB on User Request ESE128 ESB Power on In general whenever the 5062 receives an invalid SCPI command it automatically generates an error Errors are stored in a special error queue and may be retrieved from this buffer one at a time Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored When you have read all errors from the queue the generator responds with a 0 No error message If more than 30 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue is replaced with 350 Queue Overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error
178. he DDS circuit by controlling its input bits Frequency agility is described below Sweep FSK Ramped FSK FM Getting Started 1 Functional Description ei NOTE Sweep FM and FSK modulate the sample clock frequency The frequency of the signal at the output connector is only related to the sample clock frequency through the following relationship Output Frequency SCLK number of waveform points Additional information on sample clock modulation can be found in Chapter 3 The 5062 can sweep from minimum to maximum sample clock frequency setting Sweep time is programmable from 1ms to 1000 seconds with 7 digits The sweep start and stop frequency program the rear panel sine output connector You may also use the sweep from the front panel as long as you do your own calculation of start and stop frequencies depending on the present sample clock frequency and waveform length Sweep can be used in continuous mode triggered or gated run modes The 5062 will also sweep up or down using linear or logarithmic increments FSK frequency shift keying function controls the sine output connector The trigger input is used to flag the 5062 when to output carrier frequency trigger false or when it should switch to the shift frequency trigger true You may also use the FSK function from the front panel as long as you do your own calculation of carrier and shifted frequencies depending on the present sample clock frequency and wa
179. he Equation dor 4 45 Writing Equal NS EE 4 47 Equation Conventions E 4 47 YOUN E le EE 4 48 Ge enne 4 49 Combining Waveform EE 4 54 The Pulse Eemere eieiei ee A E A E R a 4 56 The Pulse Composer Commands bar 4 56 The Pulse enee TEE 4 61 Contents continued Creating EE 4 61 Setting the Pulse Editor Opin EE 4 63 Using the E EE 4 65 Pulse Example Section EE 4 67 Pulse Example Section KE 4 68 Pulse Example Section 3 ee eege eege Ee 4 70 Pulse Example ECU Assia dek Eege SEA 4 71 PUlSe Example SOCOM EE 4 72 Downloading the Pulse Train iii 4 73 Interpreting the Download Gummanm oonoooococicocnicccnnnccocononononnnnocorononcnnoncorononnononnororonnnrnnco coronan 4 73 Remote Programming Reference ccccccccsssseeeeeecceesesessseeeeneneeeeeseeeensssnenneeeeeseeneness 5 1 What s In This Chapter EE 5 3 Introduction To SOP ME 5 3 Command Fo Mala ote di Das 5 4 Command Separator iii AR 5 4 The MIN and MAX Parameters 2 e cceccceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasaaaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 5 5 Querying Parameter Setting eer Eege ds 5 5 Query Response Eet 5 5 SCPI Command Terminator acicate is 5 5 IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commandes ccccccnccoccccnonancnononanoncnnnnnnnnncnnnannnnnn cnn ncnnnnnnnnes 5 5 SGPI Parameter Ty Pe siterte added Aa ear eae 5 6 Nummere Parametros 5 6 Discrete Parameters ri e iea aa EE AAE ERE a EKER SS 5 6 Boolean BS E 5 6 Arbitrary Block ent 5 7 Binary Block Parameters EE 5 7 SCPI
180. he Standard Waveform library and then program the Frequency parameter to be 2MHz Observe and note that the SCLK parameter is showing 32MS s Note that in the standard waveform mode the SCLK parameter is set automatically by the instrument and cannot be modified directly The information that we need from this display is the number of points that the 5062 requires to generate 2MHz We can find this out from SCLK Frequency relationship 32M 2M 32 points Note this number It will be required later to compute the deviation range parameter We are now ready to proceed with programming the FM parameters Continue with the following procedure 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FM 2 Press Modulation Shape and select the Arbitrary option 3 Select the FM Sample Clock parameter and program it to 1MS s This sample clock frequency value will be needed for the following steps to calculate the frequency of the modulating waveform This will be done from Tabor Electronics Information how to use Tabor Electronics is given in Chapter 4 4 Invoke Tabor Electronics and press the FM composer The FM Composer screen is shown in Figure 3 24 Modify the Wavelength field to have 10 000 points and press the Wavelength button The number of points is derived from the following relationship N FM Sample Clock 100Hz 1M 100 10 000 5 Now you have to program the de
181. he default address is 4 To modify the address press the Enter key and use the dial or keypad to select the new address Press Enter for the 5062 to accept the new address setting eas SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 CHI CH GPIB LAN 10 100 BASE MODE Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface B Note Configuring your GPIB address setting does not automatically select the GPIB as your active remote interface Setting a remote interface is done from the Select interface menu described on page 2 7 PROGRAM ON OFF 2 OUTPUT SYNC DEB Dons ook MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC emp TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 o e o RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE om A E co y d y d son son USB Configuration Figure 2 2 GPIB Configuration Screen The USB requires no front panel configuration parameters Following simple installation steps as shown later just connect your Tabor Electronics 5062 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure The first time you connect the generator to your PC the new hardware will be detected and the message as shown in Figure 2 3 will appear 1 Found New Hardware TABOR Ww 5062 USB Waveform Generator EN xn 6 20 PM Figure 2 3 USB Device Detected 2 9 5061 5062 User Manual 2 10 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install soft
182. he transfer of 10 bytes of data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 3 designates the number of digits that follow e 100 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 5 The generator accepts binary data as 40 bit integers which are sent in five byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always five times the number of arbitrary FM waveform points For example 100 bytes are required to download 20 arbitrary FM waveform points The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 refer to the TRACe subsystem The transfer of definite length arbitrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way Carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF OaH characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary_block gt Represents arbitrary FM waveform data Downloading data to the arbitrary FM waveform memory is very different than loading arbitrary waveform data Waveform data programs amplitude domain therefore every point programs an amplitude level On the other hand FM modulating waveform data programs frequency domain therefore every point sets different sample clock frequency The FM modulating waveform data is made of 40 bit words However the GPIB link has 8 data ba
183. his RG45 connector accepts standard Ethernet cable Correct setting of the IP address is required to avoid conflicts with other instruments or equipment on the network Information how to change IP address and load instrument drivers to the computer is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This connector accepts standard USB cable The connection to the host computer is automatic and does not require any address setting from within the 5062 The first time the 5062 is connected to the computer it will request the driver file This file is located on the CD which is supplied with the instrument Information how to load the driver is provided in the Installation chapter of this manual This 24 pin connector accepts standard GPIB cable The GPIB address is configured using the front panel utility menu The 5062 conforms to the IEEE 488 2 standard Programming protocol is SCPI version 1993 0 GPIB cables are available separately from your Tabor Electronics dealer This 3 prong AC LINE connector accepts ac line voltage The 5062 senses the line voltage and sets the appropriate range automatically Therefore traditional line voltage selector is not available on the rear panel To avoid potentially hazardous situations always connect the center pin to mains ground using the line cord that is supplied with the instrument The AC fuse protects the 5062 from excessive current Always replace the fuse with the exact type and rating as pri
184. his manual Where possible the syntax and styles used in this section follow those defined by the SCPI consortium The commands on the following pages are broken into three columns the KEYWORD the PARAMETER FORM and any NOTES The KEYWORD column provides the name of the command The actual command consists of one or more keywords since SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as the tree system Square brackets are used to enclose a keyword that is optional when programming the command that is the 5062 will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional node is omitted by the programmer or not Letter case in tables is used to differentiate between the accepted short form upper case and the long form upper and lower case The PARAMETER FORM column indicates the number and order of parameter in a command and their legal value Parameter types are distinguished by enclosing the type in angle brackets lt gt If parameter form is enclosed by square brackets these are then optional care must be taken to ensure that optional parameters are consistent with the intention of the associated keywords The vertical bar can be read as or and is used to separate alternative parameter options 5 7 5061 5062 User Manual Keyword Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commanas List Summary Parameter Form Default in Bold INSTRument SELect 1 2 COUPle
185. his mode the 5062 must be in continuous operating mode Step with a O bit assigned to a step it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats then will wait for the next trigger to advance to the next step 1 Refer to Figure 3 19 and select the Advance Mode with the appropriate soft key The advance mode options as shown in Figure 3 21 will display Use the dial or arrow keys to scroll down to the required mode and press Enter to lock in the selected mode 16 600 006 8MS s 2 500 Upp Q Al MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG YNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC SEQ TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 O o E RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE a E o ey ty WEN 7 A A son son Figure 3 21 Sequence Advance Options ei Note The operating mode of the instrument as selected from the Run Modes menu affects the way that the 5062 lets you access the sequence advance mode parameter If you are in continuous mode as shown in Figure 3 21 you can select one of AUTO STEP or MIXED If you already selected the triggered run mode you ll be able to Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms select from AUTO or SINGLE only as advance modes Utilizing DDS direct digital synthesis technology the Model 5062 Generating is extremely frequency agile Changing the sample clock frequency Modulated is as easy as changing bits
186. hrough 14 until you balance the readings between 10V and 6V settings to within 10mV Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 2 ore w Modify 5062 channel 1 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4 46484V Modify the DMM setting DCV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Note and record the offset reading on the DMM Modify 5062 channel 1 offset to 4 46483V Adjust RV16 FINE OFFS1 for offset reading as was recorded in step 3 1mV Maintenance and Performance Checks Adjustment Procedures Channel 1 Offset Equipment Adjustment D DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 channel 1 amplitude setting to 1V and offset to 4V 2 Modify the DMM setting DCV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable Adjust RV4 OFFS1 fora DMM reading of 4V 10mV Note and record the value Modify 5062 channel 1 offset to 4V Adjust RV1 NULL1 for a DMM reading as was recorder in step 3 except disregard the polarity Repeat steps 1 through 5 until positive and negative readings are within 10mV SE ZONE A Channel 1 Offset Equipment Compensation D DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC ad
187. idth cannot exceed the segment size setting OUTPut SYNC WIDTh Response and default The 5062 will return the present SYNC width value Default value is 4 5 39 5061 5062 User Manual INSTrument A dual channel arbitrary waveform generator is considered as two Sub logical instruments The INSTrument subsystem provides a u system mechanism to identify and select instrument channels Factory y defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Um Hoh Limit INSTrument 1 2 1 COUPle OFF ON 0 1 OFF MODE MASTer SLAVe MASTer PHASe lt phase gt 0 0 1M INSTrument 1 2 Purpose This command will set the active channel for future programming sequences Subsequent commands affect the selected channel only e 1 will set channel 1 active e 2will set channel 2 active Parameter type Discrete INSTrument Response and default The 5062 will return 1 or 2 depending on the present active channel setting Default value is 1 INSTrument COUPIle OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will enable daisy chained instruments to operate in multi instrument synchronization mode Observe the following pre requisite conditions 1 9 pin master slave cable must be connected between the instruments The Master end of the cable connected to the master unit and the slave end of the cable connected to the slave unit 2 The SCLK OUT co
188. ied on the rear panel The 5062 should be operated from a power source with its neutral at or near ground earth potential The instrument is not intended for operation from two phases of a multi phase ac system or across the legs of a single phase three wire ac power system Crest factor ratio of peak voltage to rms should be typically within the range of 1 3 to 1 6 at 10 of the nominal rms mains voltage To ensure the safety of operating personnel the U S O S H A Occupational Safety and Health requirement and good engineering practice mandate that the instrument panel and enclosure be earth grounded Although BNC housings are isolated from the front panel the metal part is connected to earth ground A WARNING Do not attempt to float the output from ground as it may damage the Model 5062 and your equipment Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment Preparation for Use Installation Configuring the Instrument 2 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment If the instrument is to be stored for a long period of time or shipped to a service center proceed as directed below If repacking procedures are not clear to you or if you have questions contact your nearest Tabor Electronics Representative or the Tabor Electronics Customer Service Department 1 Repack the instrument using the wrappings packing material and accessories originally shipped with the unit If the original container is not avail
189. if the output is off Default value is 0 OUTPut FILTer NONE 12M 25M ALL Purpose This command will select which filter is connected to the 5062 output Observe the following restrictions when you try to use this command 1 Filter selection is not available when the instrument is set to output the standard sine waveform In fact the default waveform shape is sine Therefore filter selection will be available for use only after you select a different waveform or change the output mode to use 2 Filters are placed before the output amplifier Therefore do not expect the filters to remove in band amplifier harmonics and spurious NONE will disconnect all filters from the output path 12M will connect 12 MHz low pass elliptic filter 25M will connect 25 MHz low pass elliptic filter ALL will connect both the 12 MHz and the 25 Ml filters in series 5 37 5061 5062 User Manual Parameter type Discrete OUTPut FILTer Response and default The 5062 will return NONE 12M 25M or ALL depending on the type of filter presently connected to the output Default value is NONE OUTPut SYNC OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will turn the 5062 SYNC output on and off The SYNC output state is programmable per channel ON or 1 will set the SYNC output on e OFF or Owill set the SYNC output off Parameter type Discrete OUTPut SYNC Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the SYNC output is on or 0 if the SYNC output is off Default
190. ime Level Points The design format is unique for the current section and cannot be switched during the section design DC Intervals programs pulse duration using DC levels only Transition times for this format are at the maximum rate that the generator can produce For example if you want to draw a simple 4 64 ArbConnection 4 square waveform that has OV to 3 3V amplitude 50 duty cycle and 1ms period you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 2 Level 0 Time Interval 0 5 Cumulative Time 1 0 Note as you build the segments that the pulse is being drawn on the screen as you type in the parameters Also note that the Cumulative Time column is updated automatically with the cumulative time lapse from the start of the pulse Time Level Points programs pulse turning points using level and time markers This format is a bit more complex to use however it allows pulse design that require linear transition times For example if you want to draw a simple square waveform that has OV to 3 3V amplitude 50 duty cycle 1ms period and 100ns transition times you enter the following parameters Index 1 Level 0 Time interval 0 Cumulative Time 0 Index 2 Level 3 3 Time Interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 1 Index 3 Level 3 3 Time interval 0 4 Cumulative Time 0 5 Index 4 Level 0 Time interval 0 1 Cumulative Time 0 6
191. imes Figure 1 11 Sequenced Waveforms Output State The main outputs can be turned on or off The internal circuit is disconnected from the output connector by a mechanical switch relay This feature is useful for connecting the main outputs to an analog bus For safety reasons when power is first applied to the chassis the main output is always off Filters Two filters for each channel are built into the 5062 These filters are available for use in various applications such as the creation of high frequency sine waves and removing the staircase effect from waveforms that are generated with high frequency clock rates The filters are also used for reconstructing the standard sine waveform 1 20 Programming The 5062 Getting Started 1 Functional Description The 5062 has front panel control capability for most of its function parameters and modes However waveform data and sequence tables must be loaded to the 5062 from a host computer before it can be output arbitrary or sequenced waveforms There are a number of ways to talk to the instrument They all require that an appropriate software driver be installed in the host computer The rest is a matter of practice and knowledge of the language in use There are other system considerations like address selection that have to be settled before programming the instrument These topics are discussed in later chapters Low level programming of the 5062 is accomplished us
192. imilar manner In particular each sub system s documentation starts with a short description followed by a table showing the complete set of commands in the sub system finally the effects of individual keywords and parameters are described Complete listing of all commands used for programming the 5062 is given in Table 5 1 Commands to program the instrument over the GPIB are defined by the SCPI 1993 0 standard The SCPI standard defines a common language protocol It goes one step further than IEEE STD 488 2 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of the instrument It also defines the format of command parameters and the format of values returned by the instrument SCPI is an ASCll based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems Part of the OUTPut subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system OUTPut FILTer LPASs NONE 12M 25M ALL STATe OFF ON OUTPut is the root keyword of the command FlLTer and STATe are second level keywords LPASs is third level keyword A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 5 3 5061 5062 User Manual Command Format Command Separator 5 4 The format used to show commands in this manual i
193. indow lists Tabor Electronics devices found on your subnet Figure 6 2 shows an example of this display iix KR Ke A IP address hostname Ethemet address Serial number Model Properties 92 168 0 246 00 C0 17 41 00 0 000 Vide a as mx 4 17 41 00 01 1 10 lr I Use wait message Refresh il Close Figure 6 2 The NETConfig Utility lay NOTES Click Refresh if you do not see your device in the list of Ethernet devices or to discover a device that your NETConfig utility recently added to the subnet You can only update instruments that appear in the NETConfig window 6 31 5061 5062 User Manual 6 32 Point and click on the device you want to update The selected device will now have blue background Click on the Firmware Up button The firmware Update dialog box as shown in Figure 6 3 appears 41072 TE NETConfig Firmware Update a Fi are Update gt 00 00 17 41 00 01 Flash binary image filename File transfer progress m Current status Figure 6 3 The Firmware Update Dialog Box In the TE NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box click on the el button to browse and locate the upgrade file After you select the file its complete path will be displayed in the Flash binary image filename field as shown in Figure 6 4 Make sure the file in the path agrees with that specified by your supervisor To complete the update process click on Update and ob
194. ing SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments language Programming aspects are covered in Chapters 3 and 4 Supplied with the 5062 is a PC software package called ArbConnection This provides a user interface with a familiar windows interface which allows the user to interact with and control the 5062 directly Details of how to use ArbConnection are supplied in the following pages 1 21 5061 5062 User Manual 1 22 Chapter 2 Configuring the Instrument Title Page Installation Overview eiii ge 2 3 Unpacking and Initial Inspection c ccccccecssesssesssesssescscseecseecscscssseacsescissceeseueseeeeseeceeecaeeeas 2 3 Safety PrECAUTONG EE 2 3 Performance ie 2 4 Nee eu 2 4 Grounding Requirements nas 2 4 Long Term Storage or Repackaging for Shipment accio ninio 2 5 Prepar ti m for LSO mascara de tdo dt iaa 2 5 SCALA TG EE 2 5 Installing Software TE 2 6 Controlling the Instrument from Remote AAA 2 6 Connecting to a Remote interface a vsacegeeccteocstendesnedenzedendenas sages euaausgntentedeenseanapidonseeaeeactedeads 2 6 Selecting a Remote interface is sco ieee nana arb Bays oe ag a eee ntet 2 7 GPIB Ree le UI BEE 2 8 USB COM UD 2 9 LAN AG ONAL Le EE 2 14 CHOOSING aes talle EE 2 16 5061 5062 User Manual 2 2 Installation Overview Unpacking and Initial Inspection Safety Precautions Configuring the Instrument 2 Installation Overview This chapter contains information and instructions necessary
195. int of the last generated waveform If loops repeats were programmed the output will repeat this segment every time a trigger is received Only after executing all of the programmed loops will the sequence step to the next assigned segment e Mixed mode is a special mode which combines continuous step advance with single step advance in a sequence There are three conditions for the sequence generator to operate in this mode 1 The 5062 must be set to operate in continuous mode 2 Select the MIX sequence advance mode 3 Assign the mixed mode bits for each sequence step in your SEQ DEF command 0 programs Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem normal advance 1 programs trigger advance Step with a 0 bit assigned to it will advance automatically to the next step If 1 is assigned to a step the instrument will generate this step and its associated number of repeats continuously and only a valid trigger signal will advance this step to the next step SEQuence ADVance Response and default The 5062 will return the AUTO STEP SING or MIX depending on the present sequence advance mode setting Default value is AUTO SEQuence ADVance SOURce EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command will select the sequence advance source The source of the event causing sequence advance can be specified by the user e lt EXTernal gt will set the external advance mode e lt INTernal gt will set the internal advance mode
196. int of the waveform The instrument can be armed to receive a trigger signal from either the front panel connector remote command or from an internal free running trigger generator The period of the internal trigger generator is programmable with 7 digits The trigger signal whether it comes from the front panel or from a remote command has to pass through some electrical circuits These circuits cause some small delay known as system delay System delay cannot be eliminated completely and must be considered when applying a trigger signal It defines how long it will take from a valid trigger edge to the moment that the output reacts In gated mode the 5062 circuits are armed to generate output waveforms as long as a gating signal is present Unlike the triggered mode the gated mode is level sensitive When the gating signal goes low the waveform at the output connector is first completed and the output reverts to an idle state The idle amplitude level after the gating signal goes low is the last point on the waveform The burst mode is an extension of the triggered mode where the generator can be programmed to output a pre determined number of waveforms The source to trigger the burst can be selected from a front panel connector GPIB trigger or from the built in trigger generator Using the latest DDS direct digital synthesis technology the 5062 is extremely agile Operations like sweep FSK and FM are directly derived from t
197. ion State Common DMA State Off Separate Controlling 5062 function modes and parameters is simply a matter of pressing once or twice the appropriate button as described in the following paragraphs Refer to Figure 3 2 throughout this description 1 2 Power Switch Toggles 5062 power ON and OFF Menu Top Selects the root menu This button is disabled during parameter editing Menu Soft Keys Soft keys have two functions 1 Selects output function shape or operating mode 2 Selects parameter to be audited These buttons are disabled during parameter editing Menu Back Backs up one menu position This button is disabled during parameter editing Cancel Local Has two functions 1 When in edit mode cancels edit operation and restore last value 2 When operating the 5062 from a remote interface none of the front panel buttons are active The Local button moves 3 5 5061 5062 User Manual control back from remote to front panel buttons 9 11 12 2 SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 GEES Gesi 10 GES 50 000 900 GMHz 2 500 Upp 7 50 r g S ER BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION 8 SLOPE POSITIVE 4 5 6 Figure 3 2 5062 Front Panel Operation 6 Enter Man Trig Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters Pressing Ente
198. ions to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface The Model 5062 uses the Status Byte register group and the Standard Event register group to record various instrument conditions Figure 5 1 shows the SCPI status system An Event Register is a read only register that reports defined conditions within the generator Bits in an event register are latched When an event bit is set subsequent state changes are ignored Bits in an event register are automatically cleared by a query of that register or by sending the CLS command The RST command or device clear does not clear bits in an event register Querying an event register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register An Event Register defines which bits in the corresponding event register are logically ORed together to form a single summary bit The user can read from and write to an Enable Register Querying an Enable Register will not clear it The CLS command does not clear Enable Registers but it does clear bits in the event registers To enable bits in an enable register write a decimal value that corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits required to enable in the register 5 59 5061 5062 User Manual The Status Byte Register STB 5 60 The Status Byte summary register contains conditions from the other registers Query data waiting in the generator s output buffer is immediatel
199. it Table screen however the output will change to the new settings only after you re enter the sequence function Edit Step Provides entry point to the table You may scroll between the fields using the arrow keys If you want to edit a specific step place the cursor on the step and press Enter Edit the field as required and press Enter again to lock in the new value Insert Step Allows adding another step to the sequence table You have a choice of adding the step above or below the cursor line or at the end of the sequence table Go to Step Provides entry point to the sequence table at a specific step number Continue editing the step as described above Delete Step Use this command to delete a specific step from the sequence You ll be asked to confirm if you really want to delete the step before the final execution Delete Table Use this command to delete the entire sequence table You ll be asked to confirm if you really want to delete the step before the final execution Y Tip Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the edit parameters The Apply Changes will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms PROGRAM GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 Fem om foureur Lael e 8 Jj onz Q 3 Appl Segment Repeat Advance ki ied tose s 9 Ee A R m MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE
200. itrary block data must terminate with the EOI bit set This way carriage return CR OdH and line feed LF 5 53 5061 5062 User Manual Dal characters can be used as sequence data and will not cause unexpected termination of the arbitrary block data e lt binary_block gt Represents sequence table data The segment table data is made of 48 bit words however the GPIB link has 8 data bas lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 48 bit words and rearranged as six 8 bit words before it can be used by the 5062 as sequence table data There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data 1 Each channel has its own sequence table buffer Therefore make sure you selected the correct active channel with the INST SEL command before you download sequence table data to the generator 2 Minimum number of sequencer steps is 1 maximum number is 2048 3 The number of bytes in a complete sequence table must divide by 8 The Model 5062 has no control over data sent to its sequence table during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause erroneous sequence partition 4 The LSB bit is the only bit used in the mode byte This bit has an affect on the operation of the sequence only when Mixed Step Advance mode is active With the LSB bit set to 0 the sequence generator will advance to the next step automatically With the LSB bit
201. ks of data to the generator 4 Last data point is sent with MSB bit set to 1 Data transfer is completed and CPU resumes control FM DEViation lt deviation gt Purpose This command will set the deviation frequency in units of samples per second e lt deviation gt sets the phase offset between the channels Phase offset is in waveform points Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt deviation gt 1e 3 to 50e6 in units of samples per second FM DEViation Response and default The 5062 will return the present frequency deviation value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 Default value is 1e6 FM FUNCtion MODE FIXed USER Purpose This command will set the frequency modulating waveform mode to FlXed standard and USER arbitrary waveforms e FIXed will enable a library of built in standard waveforms e USER will set the generator to accept arbitrary waveform from an external application 5 22 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter type Discrete FM FUNCtion MODE Response and default The 5062 will return FIX or USER depending on its present setting Default is FIX FM FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid TRlangle SQUare RAMP Purpose This command will select one of the waveform shapes as the active modulating waveform e SlNusoid will select sine shape as modulating waveform e TR
202. l and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only ei Note If you use the dial or arrow keys to modify the sample clock frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter The sample clock divider is used to divide the sample clock for channel 2 This way each channel can have a different sample clock rate The sample clock is divided using integer numbers only Observe Figure 3 7 and modify frequency and sample clock using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 7 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description Programming the Amplitude and Offset Using the Instrument Programming the Amplitude and Offset PROGRAM ON OFF LEE dl SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 CHI hutput SYNC ON Filter 50M Output OFF e az Filter NONE Divider IE Position Width Offset Channel 2 CH 2 gt CH 1 D MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM COFFI FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 o O o POSITION 9 SLOPE POSITIVE EN LA LA Lut d WM d Li b A A son son Figure 3 7 Programming Sample Clock Frequency Divider First select the Outputs menu to gain access to the Channel 2 sample clock fr
203. l frequency reference to drive the counter clock 3 Adjust RV7 10MHz ADJ for 10 000000 1Hz reading 6 25 5061 5062 User Manual Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Adjustment Channel 1 Offset Fine Adjustment 6 26 Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 frequency setting to 1KHz and channel 1 amplitude to 3 161V 2 Modify the DMM setting ACV 10V and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable 3 Note and record the DMM reading 4 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 3 162V 5 Adjust RV9 LIN1 fora DMM reading as was recorded in step 3 10 mV 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for a few times until the reading is balanced to within 10mV 7 Modify the DMM setting to DCV 8 Modify 5062 frequency to 10kHz Repeat the sequence above but this time measuring DC voltage and adjust RV5 ZERO CH until you balance the readings between the two amplitude settings to within 10mV 9 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 1V 10 Modify 5062 frequency to 1MHz Adjust RV1 NULL1 fora DMM reading of OV 2mV 11 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 10 V 12 Modify DMM setting to ACV and adjust RV15 AMPL1 for a DMM reading of 3 535V 20mV 13 Modify 5062 amplitude setting to 6V 14 Re adjust RV15 AMPL1 for a DMM reading of 2 121V 10 mV 15 Repeat the sequence above from 11 t
204. l is applied from an external source to the AM IN connector and must have specific amplitude to modulate the 5062 correctly Envelope Frequency This term defines the frequency of the modulating waveform The envelope frequency is bandwidth limited so make sure you are within the specified limits before you apply this signal to the AM input connector AM Depth or Modulation Index This term defines how far the external generator can affect the main output signal The depth is usually measured in units if percent The 5062 can be amplitude modulated from an external signal only This means that besides the carrier frequency all other parameters are supplied externally by the user Therefore make sure that the signal that you apply to the AM input complies with the specification requirements set forth in Appendix A When you select AM the only parameter you can control is the AM State Each channel has an independent state so make sure that you display the correct channel before you turn on and off the AM function The AM screen is shown in Figure 3 27 To access this menu press Waveforms and from the Modulated waveforms screen select the AM type Modulation will start as soon as you apply your modulating signal to the rear panel AM IN connector Note that AM 3 49 5061 5062 User Manual has no effect on the SINE OUT signal PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 ou cH2 output sync Modulation Typ
205. l through the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 5062 is not in edit mode ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 5062 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and OFF The 5062 has a number of connectors on its rear panel These connectors are described below Figure 1 6 shows rear panel plugs indicators connectors and other parts Getting Started 1 Functional Description A AMIN A TRIG FSK IN SINE OUT A REF IN AM IN TRIG FSK IN SCL OUT POWER INPUT 85 265 V 47 63 Hz 50 VA MAX A SAFETY WARNING FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD USE 250V FUSE OF CORRECT RATING DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE REPLACING FUSE A NO U
206. langle will select triangular shape as modulating waveform SQuUare will select square shape as modulating waveform RAMP will select ramp shape as modulating waveform Parameter type Discrete FM FUNCtion SHAPe Response and default The 5062 will return SIN TRI SQU or RAMP depending on its present setting Default is SIN FM FREQuency lt FM_freq gt Purpose This command will set the modulating wave frequency This parameter affects the 5062 when set to operate in FM FUNC MODE FIX e lt FM_freq gt will set the frequency of the modulating waveform Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt FM_freq gt 1e 3 to 50e6 in units of hertz FM FREQuency Response and default The 5062 will return the present modulating waveform frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e3 5 23 5061 5062 User Manual FM FREQuency RASTer lt FM_sclk gt Purpose This command will set the modulating wave sample clock frequency This parameter affects the 5062 when set to operate in FM FUNC MODE USER lt FM_sclk gt will set the sample clock frequency of the modulating waveform Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt FM_sclk gt 1e 3 to 2e6 in units of samples per second FM FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 5062 will return the present modulating waveform sample clock frequency value The r
207. lationship Sequence Duration 1 SCLK n n the number of waveform points in the sequence including looped waveforms Amplitude Defines the amplitude of the sequenced waveform Offset Defines the offset of the sequenced waveform Active segment Programs the active segment in a sequence The SYNC will start at the active segment There is no other purpose for this parameter in the sequence Y Tip 3 29 5061 5062 User Manual Editing the Sequence Table 3 30 Use the arrow keys or the dial to scroll through the sequence parameters The View Table will remain at the top while the others may be accessed selectively If you select the View option as was described above the sequence table will display as shown in Figure 3 20 If you already have a sequence table in place you can edit the steps and modify the table per your new requirements If you do not have a sequence table you can construct the table from this screen however you must make sure first that the segments you intend to use are loaded with waveforms Observe Figure 3 20 and note the commands that are available for editing and creating a sequence table Apply Changes After you make modifications to the sequence table you must use this command to update the internal registers with the new table settings and output updated immediately with the new settings Changes if made in the table will be updated automatically when you exit the Ed
208. le you key the numbers 3 Select and press a suffix 4 Press Enter to lock in the new value Alternately after you display the edit field you may use the dial and or the arrow keys to modify the field then press Enter to lock in the new value If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment s then the output should generate your desired waveform There are four parameters that are available for programming in this window Sample Clock Defines the sample clock frequency for the arbitrary waveform Information how to modify the sample clock is given in this chapter Amplitude Defines the amplitude of the arbitrary waveform Note that regardless of the amplitude setting the vertical resolution of which the waveform is generated is always 14 bits Offset Defines the offset value of the arbitrary waveform The offset and the amplitude can be freely programmed within a 10V window 5V to 5V rails Segment Number Defines which of the segments in the working memory is currently active at the output connector As was discussed earlier the working memory can be divided to 2k segments and different waveforms loaded in each segment Any segment is available at the output connector only if it has been selected to be the active segment The segment selection field lets you select any segment from 1 to n regardless if it contains waveform data or not so be careful when y
209. litude is doubled when the output impedance is above 1MQ The channel 2 output connector outputs fixed standard waveforms to 25MHz user arbitrary and sequenced waveforms with sampling clock to 50MS s Output impedance is 500 that is the cable connected to this output should be terminated with 50Q Output amplitude accuracy is calibrated when connected to a 500 load The output amplitude is doubled when the output impedance is above 1MQ The SYNC output generates a single TTL pulse for synchronizing other instruments e an oscilloscope to the output waveform The SYNC signal always appears at a fixed point relative to the waveform The location of the SYNC signal along the waveform is programmable The SYNC output is also used as marker output when the sweep function is turned on There are three LED s on the front panel When the output state is on the light illuminates There are two LED s one for each channel and one LED for the SYNC output Front panel controls and keys are grouped in logical order to provide efficient and quick access to instrument functions and parameters Refer to Figure 1 6 throughout the following description to learn the purpose and effect of each front panel control Amplitude offset 50 000 000 aMHz p BASE MODE g UT FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE 4 Figure 1 6 5062 Front Panel Controls Getting Started 1 Functional Description
210. ll operate in continuous run mode only e ONor1 will set the arm mode on e OFF or 0 will set the arm mode off Parameter type Discrete ARM Response and default The 5062 will return 1 if the arm mode is on or 0 if the arm mode is off Default value is 0 5 42 Remote Programming Reference TRIGger Subsystem ARM SLOPe POSitive NEGative Purpose This command will set the edge sensitivity of which the 5062 will stop in arm mode The stop and start commands are applied at the rear panel TRIG IN connector POSitive will set the positive edge NEGative will set the negative edge Parameter type Discrete ARM SLOPe Response and default The 5062 will return POS or NEG depending on the present setting Default value is POS ARM BREakpoint POSition lt position gt Purpose This command will program the breakpoint position for the arm function e lt position gt will set the breakpoint position Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt position gt 0 to 1M in units of waveform points The breakpoint position can be programmed in increments of 4 points minimum ARM BREakpoint POSition Response and default The 5062 will return the present breakpoint value Default value is 0 INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will set the output in continuous operation and interrupted operation The trigger subsystem commands will affect the 5062 only after it will be set to interrupted operation e
211. lly To access the required parameter click on the parameter name The LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading e Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting 5061 5062 User Manual 4 12 Ampliiude V Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting Figure 4 5 The Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel Sample Clock Sequence Advance The Sample Clock group is comprised of parameters that control the sample clock frequency The sample clock setting affects the 5062 in arbitrary mode only Note there is only one sample clock source inside the instrument however in some case where
212. low the instructions supplied with your particular adapter Before proceed with the remote interface installation install an adapter card and follow the instructions in the following paragraphs Direct connection between a host computer and a single device with GPIB is not recommended since GPIB adapter is usually expensive and is not really required for direct connection Use GPIB connection in cases where download speed is critical to the system or when you already have GPIB system in place and you are adding the 5062 as a GPIB device The GPIB port is connected with a special 24 wire cable Refer interconnection issues to your GPIB supplier After you connect the 5062 to the GPIB port proceed to the GPIB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to select a GPIB address Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with USB is most recommended as this does not require any specific considerations and device configuration Just connect your Tabor Electronics 5062 to your PC using a standard USB cable and the interface will self configure After you connect the 5062 to the USB port proceed to the USB Configuration section in this chapter for instructions how to install the USB driver Direct connection between a single host computer and a single device with 10 100 BaseT is possible but you must use a special cable that has its transmit and receive lines crossed If your site is already wired connect th
213. ltiple segments option will place each section of the pulse train into a different memory segment and the generator will automatically be set to operate in sequenced mode Select this option for the example we are going to build later If you are not sure what to do select the freely select mode of operation and the generator will do the work for you Design Units As you design your pulse pattern it will be easier if you design it using the exact units as you would want to output to your load Select between us ms and s for the pulse intervals and mV or V for the amplitude level Select ms and V for the example we are going to build later Memory management There are two options in the memory management group The do not override loaded segments option will make sure that whatever waveforms you already stored for the arbitrary function will stay intact after you save your pulse waveform The allow pulse design with no limitations option may overwrite memory segments that you already used previously for the arbitrary function however this is the recommended option for the program and for the example we are going to build later Pulse Transition management The pulse transition management parameter defines for the program how many waveform points will be used to step from one amplitude level to another amplitude level The longer the transition time the program will need more steps to smooth the transition If you select the limit inc
214. mand removes the anchors from the waveform screen and resets anchor positions to point O and the last waveform point Undo The Undo command undoes the last editing operation The View commands have commands that let you view various sections of the waveform area The View commands include Zoom In Zoom Out Hide Show Toolbars and Channel Y waveforms Description of the view commands is given in the following Zoom In The zoom in command operates between anchors Anchors are marked as left and right hand triangles The default position of the anchors is the start and the end of the waveform To move an anchor to a new location click and hold on the triangle and drag the anchor to left or right as required If you move the left anchor to the right and the right anchor to the left the area between the anchors will zoom in as you select this command Looking at the Waveform Map as shown in Figure 4 17 you ll see that the white portion is the zoomed area Click and hold on the white area and move your cursor around and the waveform screen will be updated accordingly While zoomed in you can perform Autoline and sketch editing or zoom in further by clicking and holding the mouse at one corner and releasing the mouse button at the other corner Zoom Out The zoom out restores the screen to display the complete waveform ArbConnection 4 The Wave Composer sg Wave Composer gt C Program Files Fluke ArbExploreri Mot TemS1 wa0
215. me is required for the controller to compute the function and load its data to the waveform memory Waveform frequency is programmed with 9 digits Frequency accuracy of the output waveform is determined by the clock reference The internal reference oscillator provides 1ppm accuracy and stability over time and temperature If higher accuracy and or stability are required you may connect an external frequency reference to the rear panel reference input connector The output level may be programmed separately for each channel within from 20mV to 20Vp p into an open circuit or 10mV to 10V into 50Q Offset may be applied to the output to shift the signal either positive or negative Offset and amplitude are inter related so make sure you understand the offset amplitude ranges before you apply offset to your signal A special fine offset generator is built into each channel which allows programming of extremely small offset increments This feature extends the offset resolution to 6 digits and is very useful in applications such as mixer balancing where few micro volts could sway the balance either way Besides its normal continuous mode the 5062 responds to a variety of trigger sources The output waveform may be gated triggered or generate a counted burst of waveforms A built in trigger generator having a programmable period can be used as a replacement of an external trigger source The internal trigger generator can be programmed with re
216. mended Test Equiprientt ss arc vcccd acd decadence seston ci etecesdeiiee tues bee eter teceSecdietaades 6 6 6 2 Frequency ACCUTACY tee ee eer EENS en 6 7 6 3 Frequency Accuracy Using External 10MHz Reference sssssssersrerrrrrrrrnnrrnnrenrrennrenn 6 7 6 4 Amplitude ACCU CY 3 tscccec cstutiecctnsentescung cade tnd laadannhe sae dieeibiad e E Gegege EEN ege 6 8 E OUSStACGUE ACY EE 6 9 6 6 Square wave Characteristics Tests 6 9 6 7 Front Panel Sine wave Distortions Test 6 10 6 8 Rear Panel Sine wave Distortions Test 6 10 6 9 Front Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test 6 11 6 10 Rear Panel Sine wave Spectral Purity Test 6 11 6 11 Trigger gate and burst Characteristics oooocccnnnnnicccnnnsococconnnannnccnnnnennccnnnnennnnnrnnncnnnn 6 12 6 12 Internal Trigger Generator Operation 6 14 6 12 Required Equipment testa ani iii dd nera 6 24 viii Chapter 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 List of Figures Title Page The Model 5062 as 1 4 ArbConnection The Control banels ek 1 5 ArbConnection The Wave Composer coococcccconoccccnnnnnncccncnnnnnncccnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrcnnannnncnnns 1 5 ArbConnection The FM Wave Composer ENEE 1 6 ArbConnection The Pulse CGomposer kk 1 6 5062 Front Panel Controls caciones cite aea aiaiai ein iaaa 1 11 Model 5062 gt Rear Panel passa
217. mmand will affect the 5062 only after it will be set to interrupted operation TRG Purpose This common command has the same affect as the TRIG IMM command 5 46 Remote Programming Reference TRACe Subsystem TRACe The TRACe subsystem contains commands which allow definition of segments and their corresponding lengths addition and deletion Subsystem of segments and the loading of waveform data Sequence commands control segments link and loops Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Defaults are shown in bold Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit Hoh Limit TRACe lt header gt lt binary_block gt DEFine lt segment_number gt lt length gt DELete lt segment_number gt DELete ALL SELect lt segment_number gt SEQuence lt header gt lt binary_block gt ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed AUTOmatic SOURce EXTernal INTernal EXTernal DEFine lt link gt lt seg_ gt lt loop gt lt mode gt DELete ALL Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in memory Each data point has a vertical resolution of 14 bits 16384 points i e each sample is placed on the vertical axis with a precision of 1 16384 The Model 5062 has the following waveform memory capacity 1 Meg standard memory configuration Each horizontal point has a unique address the first being 00000 and
218. mmands and queries which are used by the 5062 CLS Clear the Status Byte summary register and all event registers ESE lt enable_value gt Enable bits in the Standard Event enable register The selected bits are then reported to the status byte ESE Query the Standard Event enable register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESR Query the Standard Event register The generator returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register IDN Query the generators identity The returned data is organized into four fields separated by commas The generator responds with its manufacturer and model number in the first two fields and may also report its serial number and options in fields three and four If the latter information is not available the device must return an ASCII O for each For example Model 5062 response to IDN is Tabor Electronics 5062 0 1 0 OPC Set the operation complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have been executed OPC Returns 1 to the output buffer after all the previous commands have been executed OPC is used for synchronization between a controller and the instrument using the MAV bit in the Status Byte or a read of the Output Queue The OPC query does not affect the OPC Event bit in the Standard Event Stat
219. mmands can reset or test the instrument or query the instrument for system information Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit SYSTem ERRor VERSion RESet RST TEST IDN SYSTem ERRor Purpose This query will interrogate the 5062 for programming errors Response to query The 5062 will return error code Error messages are listed later in this manual SYSTem VERSion Purpose This query will interrogate the 5062 for SCPI version Response to query The 5062 will return 1999 0 RESet RST Purpose This command will reset the 5062 to factory defaults IDN Purpose This query will interrogate the identity of the 5062 Response to query The 5062 will return Tabor Electronics 5062 0 1 0 5 57 5061 5062 User Manual IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries 5 58 Since most instruments and devices in an ATE system use similar commands that perform similar functions the IEEE STD 488 2 document has specified a common set of commands and queries that all compatible devices must use This avoids situations where devices from various manufacturers use different sets of commands to enable functions and report status The IEEE STD 488 2 treats common commands and queries as device dependent commands For example TRG is sent over the bus to trigger the instrument Some common commands and queries are optional but most of them are mandatory The following is a complete listing of all common co
220. mmands over USB Color LCD 3 5 reflective 320 x 240 pixels back lit Green Output on off Separate for each channel Green SYNC on off 85 to 265Vac 48 63 Hz 60W CE marked Mechanical Dimensions Weight Environmental Operating temperature Humidity non condensing Safety Appendices Specifications 212 x 88 x 415 mm W x Hx D Approximately 7 lb 0 C 50 C 11 C 30 C 85 31 C 40 C 75 41 C 50 C 45 EN61010 1 2 revision A 9 5061 5062 User Manual A 10
221. mode the maximum envelope frequency is increased to 200kHz Sample Clk Deviation This parameter specifies the range of which the sample clock frequency will deviate from the carrier 3 35 5061 5062 User Manual Example 1 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Standard FM Mode 3 36 frequency setting The deviation range is symmetrical about the carrier frequency As was mentioned before the 5062 has an extremely wide deviation range without scarifying linearity For example you can set 25MS s carrier with 40MS s deviation that is your carrier frequency will swing from 5 MS s to 45MS s Carrier Sample Clk This is the frequency of the sample clock as programmed and displayed on the screen In the case of 5062 the sample clock signal is equivalent to the carrier waveform frequency This is the value that will be modulated and not the frequency of the waveform as generated at the front panel output connector Direct output of the sample clock frequency is available at the rear panel SINE OUT connector Modulation Run mode Defines the run mode for the modulated waveforms only Note that run modes are not the same for modulated and non modulated waveforms The difference is as follows When the 5062 generates Standard Arbitrary or Sequenced waveforms and removed from continuous run mode the output idles on a dc level until a valid trigger initiates an output cycle On the other hand when the 5062 generates a modulate
222. mory can for some applications pose a limitation however if sections of the waveform are repetitive one may use the sequence generator to take these segments and replay them as part of the complete waveform without loosing valuable memory space and without scarifying waveform coherences or integrity The tool for using repetitive and multiple segments in one long waveform is called Sequence Generator The 5062 has two separate sequence generators one for each channel and ArbConnection has a special dialog box where sequences are designed This tool is called Sequence Table Using the Sequence table you can use waveforms that you already downloaded to the 5062 from the Segment table link and loop in random order to create one long and complex waveform that combines the individual memory segments 5061 5062 User Manual Waveform Studio lt Channel 1 gt Segment table File name HE GA mk Loaded Loaded Mapped Loaded C Program Files Fluke W av C Program Files Fluke Wave_2 way C Program Files Fluke Wave_3 way C ArbExplorer Mot PulsSing1 0 1000 240 88 Waveform Shape lt segment 1 gt 1 2 4 1 2 3 15 4 18 Figure 4 8 The Sequence Table ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels The Sequence Table is demonstrated in Figure 4 8 To access the Sequence table click anywhere on the Sequence Table area If it was not yet it
223. mpedance is 50Q e lt offs gt sets the amplitude offset Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 in units of volts 5 31 5061 5062 User Manual VOLTage OFFSet Response and default The 5062 will return the present offset value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 100mV would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 0 SINusoid PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command programs start phase of the standard sine waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt phase gt sets the start phase Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt phase gt 0 to 360 in units of degrees SINusoid PHASe Response and default The 5062 will return the present start phase value Default is 0 TRlangle PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command programs start phase of the standard triangular waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt phase gt sets the start phase Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt phase gt 0 to 360 in units of degrees TRlangle PHASe Response and default The 5062 will return the present start phase value Default value is 0 SQUare DCYCle lt duty_cycle gt Purpose This command programs duty cycle of the standard square waveform This command has no affect on arbitrary waveforms e lt duty_cycle gt sets the duty cycle value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range
224. ms On power up the waveform memory has no specific data The sine waveform being the default waveform on power on is computed and loaded to the waveform memory as part of the reset procedure If another waveform is required it is being computed and loaded to the waveform memory Waveforms are written from the same start address in the working memory and therefore every time that a new waveform is selected there is some minimal time for the processor to compute and download the data to the memory The 5062 can be programmed to output one of nine standard waveform shapes sine triangle square pulse ramp sine x x pulse gaussian pulse rising decaying exponential pulse noise and dc There are some parameters associated with each waveform which modify the shape of the waveform to better suit your needs For example different start phase for the sine waveform can be programmed for each channel to create phase offsets between the two output channels The 5062 working memory is capable of storing one or more user defined waveforms The 5062 is supplied with 1 Meg memory banks for each channel that can be allocated to one single waveform On the other hand there is no need to use the entire memory for only one waveform The arbitrary memory can be divided into smaller segments and each segment loaded with different waveform then the instrument can be programmed to output one segment at a time Loading data to arbitrary waveform memory
225. ms user waveform size sequence table channel 2 clock divider trigger start phase breakpoints Sample clock frequency reference source trigger modes sequence advance mode SYNC output FM FSK sweep arm start stop Multiple instruments can be connected together and synchronized to provide multi channel synchronization Phase leading edge offset between master and slave units is programmable Leading edge of master output trails the leading edge of the slave output by a programmable number of points Each slave can be programmed to have individual offset Waveform points 0 to 512k points 1 Meg Optional A 1 5061 5062 User Manual Resolution and Accuracy Initial Skew SAMPLE CLOCK Sources Internal Range Resolution Accuracy Stability Reference Standard External External Level SAMPLE CLOCK MODULATION FM Built in Standard Waveforms Description Modulation Source Modulation Frequency Range Resolution Accuracy Modulating Frequency Distortion Deviation Range Advance Marker Output and Level Position 4 point lt 20ns depending on cable length and quality typically with 20 cm coax cables 100mS s to 50MS s 9 digits limited by 1uS s Same as internal reference Same as internal reference 20 0001 1 ppm TCXO initial tolerance over a 19 C to 29 C temperature range 1ppm C below 19 C and above 29 C 1ppm year aging rate 10MHz TTL 50 2 duty cycle From rear panel BNC DC to 10
226. ms Panel Waveforms Channel 1 and 2 The Standard Waveforms panel as shown in Figure 4 4 is accessible after you click on the STD button in the Panels bar The functional groups in the Standard Waveforms Panel are described below The Waveforms group provides access to a library of built in standard waveforms The library includes Sine Triangle Square Pulse Ramp Sinc Exponential Gaussian and DC waveforms Each waveform has one or more parameters that can be adjusted for the required characteristics of the output For example phase start can be adjusted for the sine and triangle waveforms and duty cycle can be adjusted for the square waveform The pulse waveform can be adjusted for rise and fall time as well as width and delay Parameters that are associated with each waveform are automatically displayed when the waveform is selected Note that by clicking a button in this group you are immediately updating the 5062 output with this waveform shape 4 10 Figure 4 4 The Standard Waveforms Panel Frequency The Frequency control lets you program the output frequency of the selected waveform shape The frequency parameter may be modified when the LED illuminates You can use the dial keyboard or the N keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels ei Note Normal color of the digital
227. mum time to avoid damage to the components or printed conductors 3 Todesolder components use a commercial solder sucker or a solder removing SOLDER WICK size 3 4 Always replace a component with an exact duplicate as specified in the parts list The following performance checks verify proper operation of the Performance instrument and should normally be used Checks 1 As a part of the incoming inspection of the instrument specifications 2 As part of the troubleshooting procedure 3 After any repair or adjustment before returning the instrument to regular service Tests should be performed under laboratory conditions having an Environmental ambient temperature of 25 C 5 C and at relative humidity of less Conditions than 80 If the instrument has been subjected to conditions outside these ranges allow at least one additional hour for the instrument to stabilize before beginning the adjustment procedure Warm up Period Most equipment is subject to a small amount of drift when it is first turned on To ensure accuracy turn on the power to the Model 5062 and allow it to warm up for at least 30 minutes before beginning the performance test procedure 6 5 5061 5062 User Manual Initial Instrument Setting Recommended Test Equipment To avoid confusion as to which initial setting is to be used for each test it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each test
228. n in Figure 4 28 is the most complex to be discussed here Here 100 cycles of sinewave are amplitude modulated with 10 cycles of sine wave with a modulation depth of 20 To achieve this the upper and lower sidebands are defined separately and added to the fundamental or carrier The upper sideband is produced by the expression 100 cos 110 omg p and the lower sideband by the term 100 cos 90 omg p Use the following equation Ampl p 8000 sin 100 omg p 1600 cos 110 omg p 1600 cos 90 omg p Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 28 4 52 ArbConnection 4 TemSt wad lO x File Edit View Wave Download About SEV SH A sl m i kel L Anchor 0 R Anchor 1023 XY Chan Chan E Kl 8191 1 Points x m Anchor Waveform Amplitude Level Adjuster Start pts JO Max 819 Cycles Manual Original End pts 1023 Min fe1o2 fi C Auto Defaut r Equation 4095 y Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cael 6000 sin 1 00 omg p 1 200 cos 11 0 omg p 1 200 cos S0 omg p k_ FH m 767 1023 Points 8192 0 D Figure 4 28 Using the Editor to Build Amplitude Modulated Signal With Upper and Lower Sidebands Combining The last but not least powerful feature allows you to combine waveforms Ww f which you previously stored on your hard disc You can write mathematical averorms expressions that contain waveforms simple operands and t
229. nced By pressing one of these buttons output waveform will change to the selected option The default waveform type is Standard If you want to change standard waveform parameters you can select this STD panel from the Panels bar The Run Mode group is used for selecting the active run mode for the instrument You can select between continuous triggered gated and burst modes There is no additional panel associated with the continuous mode but if you press one of the other run mode options you ll be able to adjust the trigger parameters from the Trigger Panel The SYNC Output group controls SYNC type and state It also sets the position of the sync and its width The SYNC output is enabled when the State button is ON The SYNC Type toggles between Bit and LCOM The LCOM loop Complete qualifier is desirable in Sequenced wave mode where the sync will transition only once at the selected segment and will remain high throughout the duration of the sequence The position parameter defines where on the waveform the sync will transition and the width define the width of the sync pulse These two parameters are available for programming the Bit option The LCOM will not change if you modify this parameter The Output group is used for controlling the state of the 5062 channel 1 and 2 outputs Click on the State buttons to toggle the outputs on and off ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels 4 9 5061 5062 User Manual The Standard Wavefor
230. nnector from the master unit is connected to the SCLK IN on the slave unit 3 The master unit is selected as master and the slave unit is selected as slave 4 The command is sent from the master unit only ON or 1 will set the couple mode on OFF or 0 will set the couple mode off Parameter type Discrete INSTrument COUPle 5 40 Remote Programming Reference 5 INSTrument Subsystem Response and default The 5062 will return 0 or 1 depending on the present instrument couple setting Default value is 0 INSTrument COUPle MODE MASTer SLAVe Purpose This command will select master and slave instruments in multi instrument synchronization mode Note that only one instrument in a chain may be set as master All other instruments must be set as slaves e MASTer will set the master instrument e SLAVe will set the slave instrument Parameter type Discrete INSTrument COUPle MODE Response and default The 5062 will return MAST or SLAV depending on the present instrument couple setting Default value is MAST INSTrument COUPle PHASe lt phase gt Purpose This command will program the phase offset between master and slave units This command has no effect on the instrument in modes other than instrument couple The phase command requires that at least one segment be defined for channel B lt phase gt will set the leading edge offset between master and slave units Parameter type Numeric integer only Parameter range lt
231. nnosannnnsrnnnessnnnnosnrnnosrnrnnnnrrnennenne 6 27 Channel 2 Amplitude and Balance Adiustment 6 28 Channel 2 Offset Fine Adjustment ooococccccccooococccncccnnnnnnoccnnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnccnnnnnnnns 6 28 Channel 2 Offset Adjustment ooooooooccccccccccncnnccnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnn 6 29 Channel 2 Offset COMPENSATION occcccccoccnnccccncnnnncconcnnnononcnnnnnnanonononanononaninnnnnnos 6 29 Updating SOG2 F lge EE 6 30 What s in This Chapter CAUTION RIFA GP ELECIAICAL GOA UG NG GIEN vma oo D reir CH Disassembly Instructions Maintenance and Performance Checks What s in This Chapter This chapter provides maintenance and service information performance tests and the procedures necessary to adjust and troubleshoot the Model 5062 Universal Waveform Generator A A WARNING The procedures described in this section are for use only by qualified service personnel Many of the steps covered in this section may expose the individual to potentially lethal voltages that could result in personal injury or death if normal safety precautions are not observed A CAUTION ALWAYS PERFORM DISASSEMBLY REPAIR AND CLEANING AT A STATIC SAFE WORKSTATION If it is necessary to troubleshoot the instrument or replace a component use the following procedure to remove the side panels 1 Using a Phillips head screwdriver remove the screws from the top and bottom covers Carefully lift the top cove
232. nted on the rear panel If the fuse blows again after replacement we recommend that you refer your instrument immediately to the nearest LeCroy service center The 5062 can be programmed to operate in one of four run modes continuous triggered gated and counted burst These modes are described below As was discussed above both channels share common run mode and if placed in trigger mode will simultaneously start generating waveforms when a valid trigger signal is received at the trigger input If you are using the one of the standard function both waveforms will start and complete at exactly the same instance In arbitrary mode you may select different wavelength for each channel In this case if you have different waveform length the trigger will initiate one output cycle and the outputs will generate one complete waveform The 5062 will idle when the longest waveform has completed 5061 5062 User Manual Continuous Mode Triggered Mode Gated Mode Burst Mode Frequency Agility In normal continuous mode the selected waveform is generated continuously at the selected frequency amplitude and offset setting In triggered mode the 5062 circuits are armed to generate one output waveform The trigger circuit is sensitive to transitions at the trigger input Select between positive or negative transitions to trigger the instrument When triggered the generator outputs one waveform cycle and remains idle at the last po
233. nternal Trigger ACCUPAG Yes secs cic e EE Eege 6 14 SEQUENCE OP ad 6 15 Automatic ne 6 15 A EE 6 16 AMS AV e 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics ooocconnncccccnnococcccnncanncnnanancccnnnnnnn nc nn naar nccnnnnnn nn 6 18 eege eeh ee 6 18 Ramped E 6 19 A EE 6 19 FM e WEN EE 6 21 FMi ATD WAV GIONS fs ee ec GUE EI ito i ee ee 6 22 EE 6 23 ae E tun EE 6 24 MO UC EE 6 24 RI le EE 6 24 Environmental Conditions EE 6 24 vi Contents continued Required EQUIPO situa 6 24 Initial Instrument Setting EE 6 25 Adjustment ee e 6 25 DDS Duty Cycle AUS Medici ita 6 25 Sine Out Offset AdjuS Medium de 6 25 TCXO Frequency AdjUStMent ANNER 6 25 Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Adjustment ooocoocccccnnnccccnccnananannncnnnnncnnnnnnnn nn 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Fine AUS Meios rd 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Adjustment iii iia 6 27 Channel 1 Offset Compensation ridad 6 27 Channel 2 Amplitude and Balance Adjustment ooocoocccccnnncccnncccananannncnnnnncnannnn no nnnos 6 28 Channel 2 Offset Fine Acdiustmment Au 6 28 Channel 2 Offset Adjustment kee 6 29 Channel 2 Offset Compensation EE 6 29 Updating 5062 gen EEN 6 30 Appendices A oeo iaa E EE EE Ee ee A 1 vii List of Tables Chapter Title Page 2 1 Valid and Invalid IP Addresses for Subnet Mask 2 2pb 2pb0 2 16 3 1 Default Conditions After Heset AEN 3 5 3 2 FrontPanel Mensuales ii ebe depor 3 7 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Gummarm cnn anno ccnnnnannnnnnn 5 8 6 1 Recom
234. nts you can easily calculate the phase point from the above equation When you modify the phase offset parameter you are offsetting the phase of channel 2 in reference to edge of channel 1 For example if you program phase offset of 100 points and check the results on an oscilloscope what you should expect to see is channel 2 start phase lagging channel 1 by 100 points Phase offset between channels is programmed in the Outputs menu as shown in Figure 3 27 Place the cursor on the CH 2 gt CH 1 field and press Enter Modify the value using the numeric keypad or the dial and then press Enter to lock in the new value PROGRAM ON OFF G E soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 on ou foutput sync i 3 Serge CEE Output ON S ON e Filter e l ZY OE Position Y a ODE pe Filter NONE Offset Channel 2 oe a E NO MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC MOD TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 e O o F POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE am L am WN O O A A son son C CJ C CJ 0 a Figure 3 28 Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels 3 51 506 1 5062 User Manual Synchronizing Multiple Instruments 3 52 MASTER The Tabor Electronics 5062 comes with two output channels In applications requiring more output channels as well as complete control over inter channel synchronization you can not just use separate instruments because the output signals will not be synchroni
235. o 4 5 lt delay gt 0 to 99 9 lt rise gt 0 to 99 9 lt high gt 0 to 99 9 lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 APPLy PULSe Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt Default values are 1 e6 5 0 10 10 10 10 APPLy RAMP lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt fall gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output ramp waveform along with its associated parameters e lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz 5 17 5061 5062 User Manual lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts lt delay gt sets the delay to the pulse rise transition in units of lt rise gt sets the pulse rise time in units of lt fall gt sets the pulse fall time in units of Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt delay gt 0 to 99 9 lt rise gt 0 to 99 9 lt fall gt 0 to 99 9 APPLy RAMP Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt high gt lt fall gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 10 10 10 APPLy SINC lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt N_cycles gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output sinc waveform along with its associated parameters e lt freq gt se
236. o EN Em Ed i T b Wi b Ti b A A son son Figure 3 11 Gated Mode Parameters Burst mode is similar to Triggered mode with the exception that only one trigger signal is needed to generate a counted number of output waveforms In Burst mode the output remains at a DC level as long as the trigger signal at the rear panel remains inactive The trigger input is sensitive to either the rising edge or the falling edge of the trigger signal Each time a transition occurs at the trigger input the 5062 generates preprogrammed number of waveform cycles At the end of the burst the output resumes position at a DC level equal to the last point of the waveform The burst count is programmable from 1 to 1 million cycles There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode Advance Source Defines the trigger source External enables the trigger input Internal disables the trigger input and enables an internal free running trigger generator that automatically triggers the output at programmable intervals Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Timer Set the intervals for the internal trigger generator This value is accessible only if you are using the internal trigger generator as the trigger source and Burst Count Defines the number of cycles the generator will output after a trigger signal Each channel can be programmed to have a unique burst counter You may use the counted burst mode in conjunction with standard an
237. o the 5062 from the Command field and the instrument will respond to queries in the Response field The command editor is very useful while developing your own application Build your confidence or test various commands using the command editor This way you can assure that commands or syntax that you use in your application will behave exactly the same way as it responds to the editor commands A complete list of SCPI commands is available in Chapter 5 Being an arbitrary waveform generator the 5062 has to be loaded with waveform data before it can start generating waveforms The waveform generation and editing utility is part of AroConnection and is called The Waveform Composer This program gives you tools to create definitions for arbitrary waveforms It can also convert coordinates from other products such as oscilloscopes and use them directly as waveform data The program is loaded with many features and options so use the following paragraphs to learn how to create edit and download waveforms to the 5062 using the Waveform Composer To launch the wave composer point and click on the WAVE button in the Panels bar Figure 4 15 shows an example of the wave composer The Wave Composer has main sections Commands bar Toolbar and Waveform screen Refer to Figure 4 15 throughout the description of these sections The commands bar provides access to standard Windows commands such as File and View In addition there are ArbConnection s
238. odifying Arm commands bear in mind that the instrument must be in continuous mode only The arm function requires definition of breakpoints Additional information on the arm function is given in Chapter 3 To turn ARM on and off click on the State button Select the Position LED to program breakpoint position The Positive on Negative slope options will determine edge sensitivity for the trigger input 4 21 5061 5062 User Manual The Modulation Panel 1 The Modulation functions were designed over two separate panels as shown in Figures 4 10 and 4 11 The panels are invoked by pressing the MOD1 or MOD2 buttons on the panels menu These panels provide access to all modulation functions and their respective run modes and parameters The modulation functions that are available on both panels are FM frequency modulation AM amplitude modulation FSK frequency shift keying and Sweep Using ArbConnection modulation is programmed simultaneously for both channels except for AM where each channel can be programmed separately When modulation run is other than continuous the instrument generates non modulated carrier frequency until a valid stimuli signal is applied Each of the modulation panels has a different set of functions and parameters These groups are described below FM 4 22 Wave Parameters Figure 4 10 The Modulation Panel 1 The FM group contains parameters for controlling the sample clock To turn the FM
239. of 150kHz the generator automatically sets the SCLK to 38 4MS s and the number of waveform points to 256 If you try to sweep up from this point then your maximum frequency will be 195 312kHz 50MS s 256 Pts 195 312kHz Therefore and due to these limitations it is recommended using the sweep modulation in conjunction with arbitrary waveforms because you are in complete control of the number of points and the sample clock frequency you are using to generate your waveform 3 45 5061 5062 User Manual Example 1 Generating Sweep Using Standard Waveforms 3 46 3 Itis also recommended to use the SINE OUT at the rear panel because the start and stop frequency settings are available at this output at nominal values without the need to compute values for different waveform types Sweep Time Defines the time interval that it takes for the 5062 output to execute one complete sweep The sweep time is generated with an asynchronous free running time interval generator that has programmable intervals from 1ms to 1000 seconds Marker This defines a sample clock frequency of which when transitioned through will output a marker pulse at the SYNC output connector The default position of the marker is the sweep start frequency Modulation Run Mode Defines the run mode for the swept waveform only Note that run modes are not the same for modulated and non modulated waveforms The difference is as follows When the 5062 g
240. ograms before After you have installed ArbConnection on your computer read the following paragraphs to learn how to find your way around ArbConnection s menus Once you are familiar with the basics you ll continue to learn about features programming and editing commands If you can t find the answer to a question in this guide call your distributor or the LeCroy customer support service near you and we ll gladly assist you with your problems For the Advanced User If you are already familiar with computer conventions and have basic knowledge of Windows programming you may want to skip some of the following paragraphs This manual uses certain typographical conventions to make it easier for you to follow instructions These conventions are de scribed in the following Enter or Press the Enter or Return key Esc Press the Escape key Alt F Press the Alt key and the key that follows simultaneously In this example the key that follows is F Ctrl S Press the Control key and the letter that follows simulta neously In this example the letter is S The control key also appears in the menus as a target sign 1 4 gt lt Press the Arrow key with the symbol pointing in the direction specified i e up down left or right lt gt Press the key for the character or word enclosed in angle brackets In this case the Plus sign key ArbConnection 4 The Opening Screen Invoke ArbConnection by double cli
241. ol bits and are not available for normal programming They must be set to 0 at all times Pon Figure 5 2 shows how to initially prepare the 16 bit word for a waveform data point Note that there are 14 bits used for data representation The other two bits are used for control purpose and must be set to 0 Also note that the 5062 can not accept formats as shown in Figure 5 2 Data has to be further manipulated to a final format that the instrument can accept and process as waveform point MSB high byte gt low byte LSB ps pts Jos ore ort foro be os o7 os os oa os o2 or oo 14 bit binary value 0 to 16383 decimal 2 control bits Must be set to 0 initially Figure 5 2 16 bit Initial Waveform Data Point Representation Figure 5 3 shows the same 16 bit word as in Figure 5 2 except the high and low bytes are swapped This is the correct format that the 5062 expects as waveform point data The first byte to be sent to the generator is the low byte and then high byte low byte lt gt high byte Por os oe oo os oe or oo ows ore ows owe on oo oe oe 2 control bits Must be set to 0 initially Figure 5 3 16 bit Waveform Data Point Representation 5 49 5061 5062 User Manual As an example Figure 5 4 shows word value of decimal 8025 0x1F59 in a correct format for downloading to the 5062 The byte containing 59 is sent first and then the byte containing 1F low
242. ommand is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output square waveform along with its associated parameters e lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt duty_cycle gt sets the squarewave duty cycle in units of 5 16 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt duty_cycle gt 0 to 360 APPLy SQUare Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt duty_cycle gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 50 APPLy PULSe lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output pulse waveform along with its associated parameters lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts lt delay gt sets the delay to the pulse rise transition in units of lt rise gt sets the pulse rise time in units of lt high gt sets the pulse high time in units of lt fall gt sets the pulse fall time in units of Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 t
243. ommand will build a complete sequence table in one binary download In this way there is no need to define and download individual sequencer steps Using this command sequence table data is loaded to the 5062 using high speed binary transfer in a similar way to downloading waveform data with the trace command High speed binary transfer allows any 8 bit bytes including extended ASCII code to be transmitted in a message This command is particularly useful for long sequences that use a large number of segment and sequence steps As an example the next command will generate two step sequence with 12 bytes of data that contains segment number repeats loops and mixed mode flag option SEQuence 212 lt binary_block gt This command causes the transfer of 12 bytes of data 2 step sequence to the sequence table buffer The lt header gt is interpreted this way e The ASCII 23 designates the start of the binary data block e 2 designates the number of digits that follow e 12 is the number of bytes to follow This number must divide by 8 The generator accepts binary data as 48 bit integers which are sent in two byte words Therefore the total number of bytes is always six times the number of sequence steps For example 12 bytes are required to download 2 sequence steps to the sequence table The IEEE STD 488 2 definition of Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data format is demonstrated in Figure 5 1 The transfer of definite length arb
244. on number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier 4 67 5061 5062 User Manual 4 68 Before you start entering values to this section note that there are linear transitions required for this section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 39 lol x Current le zt d View ka Train DI Ka Ca CH1 CH2 Pulse Train Design Format Index Leve te EDUN DC Intervals NES 0 0 0 Llime Level Points Pi 4 0 2 4 Append Insert Delete 0 0 Delete All Undo Vertical Scale 10 1 25YDiv Horizontal Scale 23ms 2 3ms Div Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 14 ms Repeat E pusin KRE SmE _ Figure 4 39 Building Section 2 of the Pulse Example ArbConnection 4 Pulse Example The second pulse section is complete We are ready now to start Section 3 building the third section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 34 Point and click on the Edit command and select the A
245. on table does not download waveforms Use the memory partition table only if you merged a few waveforms to one The partition table then divides the memory to the individual and original size of ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels each waveform If you download waveforms using the waveform studio they already contain segment size and there is no need for further use of the memory partition table Using the Waveform The Waveform Studio as shown in Figure 4 7 has two parts 1 Studio Segment Table and 2 Sequence Table The purpose of the waveform studio is to provide access to waveform files that are already resident in the system These files can be delegated to various segments and later be used as individual waveforms or combined into complex sequences The Segment Table Using the Segment Table you may list and download waveform files that were previously stored on the computer The table shows the segment number and its associated file name length and its download status There are other means to download waveforms to memory segments such as the Wave Composer and individual function calls The waveform studio makes it easier by combining multiple and complex commands into one simple dialog box To access the Segment table click anywhere on the Segment Table area If it was not yet it will turn white as opposed to the Sequence Table area that turns gray The Segment Table area is divided into three parts the table area the waveform
246. onnect to channel 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for channel 2 Test Results Pass Fail ei NOTE Leave the same setup for the next test Single Advance Equipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation 1 Use the same preparations as for step advance except change mode to single sequence advance 2 Change function generator run mode to triggered 3 Change Oscilloscope configuration to single Test Procedure 1 Press the manual trigger button on the function generator and observe that one cycle waveform advances through the sequence table repeatedly with each external trigger signal Note that you need to press the Single mode on the oscilloscope for each trigger advance Test Results Pass Fail 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and connect to chan 2 3 Repeat the test procedure as above for chan 2 Test Results Pass Fail 6 17 5061 5062 User Manual Modulated Waveforms Characteristics FSK Equipment Oscilloscope LeCroy LT342 fitted with jitter package function generator Preparation 1 Configure the oscilloscope as follows Time Base 0 5 ms Memory 250k Sampling Rate 50MS s at least Trace A View Jitter Type FREQ CLK Trigger source Channel 2 positive slope Amplitude 1V div 2 Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input chan 1 3 Connect the
247. ou select a segment number as it may be empty and no output will be generated Delete Segments Allows distractive removal of all segments from the memory In fact this command does not erase the memory but only removes the table that defines start and stop for each segment location If you have recorded your segment sizes you can always re define the segment table which will restore the original waveforms in each segment There is however no way back if you perform a download action after you delete the segment table 3 25 5061 5062 User Manual d PROGRAM ON OFF Gen be E soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 Fon E 12 1 fo Ge Sample Clock Amplitude 1 9 Segment Number FREQ 250 BASE MODE FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 di z no E RUN CONT POSITION a SLOPE POSITIVE ey Wey PA F son aries a 3 10 56 MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG YNC OUT ARM OFF Figure 3 17 Programming Arbitrary Waveform Parameters Generating Sequenced Waveforms 3 26 In general the Model 5062 cannot by itself create sequenced waveforms If you want to use sequenced waveforms you must first load them into the instrument The 5062 is supplied with waveform creation and editing called Tabor Electronics Besides waveform creation Tabor Electronics has instrument control features sequence table generator FM composer and many other features that will be described separately To generate a sequence you must firs
248. output connectors must be properly terminated to minimize signal reflection or power loss due to impedance mismatch Proper termination is also required for accurate amplitude levels at the output connectors Use 500 cables and terminate the main and SYNC cables with terminating resistors Always place the 50Q termination at the far end of the cables The Model 5062 provides protection for internal circuitry connected to input and output connectors Refer to the specifications in Appendix A to determine the level of protection associated with each input or output connector The 5062 utilizes non volatile memory backup that automatically stores the last setup before the generator was turned off Every time you turn on the instrument the non volatile memory updates the front panel setting with modes parameters and waveforms from its last setting with only one exception for safety reasons the outputs remain off even if they were turned on before powering 3 3 5061 5062 User Manual 3 4 O o pom B down the 5062 After power on the instrument displays information messages and updates the display with the last setup information The 5062 can always be reset to its default values Information on how to restore default parameters is given below If you are not yet fully familiar with front panel operation of the 5062 you may find yourself locked into a dead end situation where nothing operates the way it should The faste
249. ox with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Pulse Composer The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below 4 55 5061 5062 User Manual 101x De ae Joen ka train gt Sz Z om op EZ m Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals SEE Time Level Points Ho Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo M Section Properties Design Units MV ms Section Start 40 ms Repeat 2 Duration x R 35 2 ms W N Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 75 2ms 7 52ms Div La oO Own of Figure 4 30 The Pulse Composer Screen File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control pulse 4 56 waveform files Also use this command to print the active waveform or exit the pulse composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New The New Ctrl N command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New command is destructive to the displayed waveform Open The Open Ctrl O command will let you browse through your disk space for previously saved pulse waveform files and load them to the
250. pecific commands such as Edit Wave and System In general clicking on one of the commands opens a dialog box with an additional list of commands Then clicking on an additional command may open a dialog box or generate an immediate action For example Clicking on File and then Exit will cause an immediate termination of the Wave Composer On the other hand clicking on Wave and then on Sine will open a Sine Wave dialog box that lets you program and edit sine wave parameters The various commands in the Commands bar are listed and described below ArbConnection 4 The Wave Composer File Commands The File command has 4 command lines that control waveform files Also use this command to print the active waveform or exit the wave composer program Description of the various commands under File is given below New Waveform The New Waveform Ctrl N command will remove the waveform from the screen If you made changes to the waveform area and use the New Waveform command you should save your work before clearing the screen The New Waveform command is destructive to the displayed waveform Figure 4 15 The Wave Composer Opening Screen Open Waveform The Open Waveform Ctrl O command will let you browse your disk for previously saved waveform files and load these waveforms to the waveform area This command is also very useful for converting waveform files to format that is acceptable by the Wave Composer The Open Waveform
251. perate the Main Panel can serve as general guide for controlling the rest of the panels ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Looking at the panel you can identify the following controls Push buttons LED s radio buttons Dial and Digital display The function of each control is described below Push Buttons These are used for toggling a function on and off For example the Output Enable button in the Output group toggles the output on and off The first mouse click will push the button inwards and will turn on a red bar at the center of the button indicating that the function is on The second mouse click will turn the function off Radio Buttons Are used for changing operating modes or selecting between mode options One of the radio buttons is always on with a red dot in its center indicating its state condition LED s The LED s indicate which of the parameters are displayed on the Digital Display Red LED indicates that the parameter name next to this LED is selected Only one LED can be ON at a time Y HINT LED s are turned on by clicking on the LED or the text next to it The selected parameter is flagged by a darker LED shade Dial Use the dial to modify displayed reading To use the dial press and hold the mouse cursor on the dial and move the mouse in a clockwise circle to increase the number or counterclockwise circle to decrease the displayed number The dial modifies digits at the cursor position
252. phase gt 0 to 1M in units of waveform points The phase offset can be programmed in increments of 4 points INSTrument COUPle PHASe Response to query version The 5062 will return the present phase offset value Default value is 0 5 41 5061 5062 User Manual TRIGger The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize device actions with external events These commands control the trigger modes of the Subsystem Model 5062 The generator can be placed in Triggered Gated or Burst mode Trigger source is selectable from an external source an internal trigger generator or a software trigger Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Keyword Parameter Form Default Low Limit High Limit ARM OFF ON 0 1 ON SLOPe POSitive NEGative POSitive BREakpoint POSition 7 lt position gt 0 0 1M INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 ON TRIGger BURSt OFF ON 01 1 OFF COUNt lt count gt 1 1 1e6 GATE OFF ON 0 1 OFF PHASe lt phase gt 0 0 1M SLOPe POSitive NEGative POSitive SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal INTernal TIMer lt interval gt 1e3 100e 3 2e6 IMMediate TRG ARM OFF ON 0 1 Purpose This command will arm the 5062 to stop and start generating output waveforms The instrument will stop at a breakpoint set with one of the arm command This mode wi
253. ppend Section option A new section number will appear but it will show empty next to the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there are fast transitions required for this section Therefore select the DC Intervals option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values In case you made a mistake and want to switch design formats after you have already typed in some values the Pulse Editor will show an error alerting you that design format can only be changed for empty section In this case the only way to recover is to delete all entries and start from an empty index list Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 40 10 x Mew Ful train 3 F on op 31 y Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals nc Time Level Points CEN Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 23 ms Repeat 5 Apply Duration x Al 15 ms Vertical Scale 10 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 38ms 3 8ms Div Figure 4 40 Building Section 3 of the Pulse Example 4 69 5061 5062 User Manual Pulse Example Section 4 The third pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the forth section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 34 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new sec
254. press the Execute button for the command to update the instrument The functional groups in the Main Panel are explained below The Parameters group has two parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset To access the required parameter click on the LED or the text next to it to display the required parameter The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 7 HI keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading ei Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated Waveforms Run Mode SYNC Output Output yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Waveforms group is used for selecting between waveform types The 5062 provides three types of waveforms Standard Arbitrary and Seque
255. pt waveforms from 100Hz to 25kHz in 10ms We ll now check the results at the rear panel sine output connector and compare what we get there to what we see on the front panel AM Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms Remove the cable from the main output connector and connect to the rear panel SINE OUT connector Here is what you should expect to see when you check this output Carrier waveform is sine wave having fixed amplitude level of 1V into 50Q The waveform is swept from 10kHz to 2 5MHz in 10ms Sweep step is linear Amplitude modulation unlike frequency modulation is not digital Modulating waveform must be applied to a rear panel connector to modulate the 5062 outputs Amplitude modulation control is separate for each channel so you can amplitude modulate one channel without affecting the other Before using the AM function you should get yourself familiar with some of the terms Carrier This term represents the modulated waveform before modulating signal has been applied The carrier could be any type and shape that the 5062 can generate Carrier Frequency This term defines the frequency of the carrier waveform In arbitrary waveforms mode the frequency of the output waveform is derived from the sample clock frequency and the number of points used to generate the active waveform segment Envelope Waveform This is the signal that modulates the carrier waveform In the 5062 the modulating signa
256. pulse screen area File extension that can be read to the pulse composer is pls ArbConnection 4 Save The Save Ctrl S command will store the active waveform in your 5062 directory with a pls extension If this is the first time you save your waveform the Save As command will be invoked automatically letting you select name location and format for your waveform file Save As Use the Save As command the first time you save your waveform It will let you select name location and format for your waveform file Print With this command you may print the active Pulse Window The standard printer dialog box will appear and will let you select printer setup or print the waveform page Exit The Exit command ends the current Pulse Composer session and takes you back to the Panels screen If you made changes to your waveform since it was last saved the Wave Composer will prompt you to Save or Abandon changes these changes Edit Commands The Edit commands are used for adding or removing pulse train sections Use these commands to Append Delete Insert or Undo last operation The editing commands are explained in the following paragraphs Append Section The Append Section command lets you append a new section at the end of the pulse train Only one new section can be appended at the end of the train If an empty section already exists the append command will alert for an error New sections are always appended at the
257. put cycle the output resumes position at a DC level that is equal to the amplitude of the last point of the waveform There are four parameters you can adjust for this mode Advance Source Defines the trigger source External enables the trigger input Internal disables the trigger input and Gated Mode Using the Instrument 3 Selecting a Run Mode enables an internal free running trigger generator that automatically triggers the output at programmable intervals Slope Defines edge sensitivity for the trigger input Timer Set the intervals for the internal trigger generator This value is accessible only if you are using the internal trigger generator as the trigger source and Start Positions Defines the start point on the waveform for the trigger signal The start position parameter may serve as a trigger delay generator where the delay is set in number of waveform points You may use the triggered mode to trigger standard arbitrary and sequenced waveforms The Trigger run mode parameters are shown in Figure 3 10 ERLE E gt PROGRAM ON OFF 2 ma SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 CHI cH2 OUTPUT SYNC S i OOO Advance Src Mis Positive T Seil 1 oore Lz E Timer 10 000 00kHz E o DOE wen and 9 ae esc 0 0 MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE SYNC OUT FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 o z o o e ota R f b H d WM b A A Son son Figure 3 10 Trigger Run Mode Parameters When s
258. quipment Oscilloscope function generator Preparation Configure the Oscilloscope as follows Termination 20dB 50Q feedthrough attenuator Setup As required for the test Connect 5062 Channel 1 output to the oscilloscope input Configure the function generator as follows Frequency 10kHz Run Mode Triggered Waveform Square wave Amplitude Adjust for TTL level on 50Q Connect the function generator output to the 5062 rear panel TRIG IN connector Connect 5062 Ch1 to the Oscilloscope input Configure the 5062 channels 1 2 as follows Reset SCLK 50MS s Waveform Sequence Seq Advance Step Run Mode Continuous Trigger Source External Amplitude 2V Output On Using ArbConnection prepare and download the following waveform Segment 1 Sine 1000 points Segment 2 Triangle 1000 points Segment 3 Square 1000 points Segment 4 Sinc 1000 points Segment 5 Gaussian Pulse 1000 points Using ArbConnection build and download the following sequence table Step 1 Segment 1 loop 1 Step 2 Segment 2 loop 1 Step 3 Segment 3 loop 1 Step 4 Segment 4 loop 1 Step 5 Segment 5 loop 1 Test Procedure Press the manual trigger button on the function generator and observe that the waveforms advance through the sequence table repeatedly Test Results Pass Fail 6 16 Maintenance and Performance Checks Sequence Operation 2 Remove the cable from 5062 channel 1 and c
259. r arrow keys to modify the frequency parameter the output is updated immediately as soon as you modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter The frequency of the sample clock will affect the output waveform only if arbitrary or sequenced waveforms are generated First select an arbitrary waveform as described earlier and then proceed with sample clock frequency modification Observe Figure 3 6 and modify the sample clock using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 6 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 3 11 5061 5062 User Manual MENU Sample Clock ES Segment Number F BASE MODE e E RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE O son 50 PROGRAM be E soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR 4145062 ou oe 1 0 CORK MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG OUT ARM OFF A n Figure 3 6 Modifying Sample Clock Frequency Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 2 3 12 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the Sample Clock parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to dial the new sample clock frequency value 3 Press M for MHz k for kHz x1 for Hz or m for mHz to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the sample clock frequency value with the dia
260. r from its back end and slide the cover to the rear to clear the front panel spring latch Do the same for the bottom After removing the covers from the instrument access the component side for calibration and checks and the solder side when replacing components When replacing the top and bottom covers reverse the above procedure 6 3 5061 5062 User Manual Special Handling of Static Sensitive Devices Cleaning 6 4 CMOS devices are designed to operate at very high impedance levels for low power consumption As a result any normal static charge that builds up on your person or clothing may be sufficient to destroy these devices if they are not handled properly When handling such devices use the precautions described below to avoid damaging them 1 CMOS IC s should be transported and handled only in containers specially designed to prevent static build up Typically these parts are received in static protected containers of plastic or foam Keep these devices in their original containers until ready for installation 2 Ground yourself with a suitable wrist strap Remove the devices from the protective containers only at a properly grounded workstation 3 Remove a device by grasping the body do not touch the pins 4 Any printed circuit board into which the device is to be inserted must also be grounded to the bench or table 5 Use only anti static type solder suckers 6 Use only grounded soldering irons
261. r generator source Memory Management The memory management group provides access to the memory partition and waveform studio screens The Waveform Partition button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 6 and the Waveform Studio button opens a screen as shown in Figure 4 7 Information how to use these screens is given in the following paragraphs Using the Memory If you want to learn more about waveform memory and segment Partition Table control you should refer to section 3 of this manual In general the 5062 can generate arbitrary waveforms but before it can generate waveforms they must be downloaded to the instrument from a host computer Waveforms are downloaded to the instrument as coordinates and are stored in the 5062 in a place designated as waveform memory The waveform memory has a finite size of 1M Having such long memory does not necessarily mean that you have to use the entire memory every time you download a waveform On the contrary the 5062 allows segmentation of the memory so that up to 4096 smaller waveforms could be stored in this memory There are two ways to divide the waveform memory to segments 1 Define a segment and load it with waveform data define the next and load with data then the third etc or 2 Use what ArbConnection has to offer and that is to make up one long waveform that contains many smaller segments download it to the instrument in one shot and then download a memory partition table that splits
262. r in step 3 except disregard the polarity Repeat steps 1 through 5 until positive and negative readings are within 10mV ee EE te Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable 500 Feedthrough termination Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 channel 2 amplitude setting to 50mV and frequency to 1MHz 2 Modify the DMM setting DCV 100mV and connect the front panel CHAN 2 connector to the DMM input Use 50Q Feedthrough termination at the DMM side of the BNC cable 3 Adjust RV8 OFFS COMP2 for a DMM reading of OV 10mV 6 29 5061 5062 User Manual Updating 5062 Firmware A CAUTION 6 30 la BABBO MENU Only qualified persons may perform Firmware updates DO NOT even attempt to perform this operation unless you were trained and certified by Tabor Electronics as you may inflict damage on the instrument Always verify with the factory that you have the latest firmware file before you start with your update Before you update the firmware of your 5062 check the revision level which is installed in your instrument Each firmware update was done for a reason and therefore if you want to update the firmware for a problem in your system check the readme file that is associated with the update to see if an update will solve your problem The revision level of your firmware can be displayed as shown in Figure 6 1 To access this screen select the TOP menu then select the Utility soft key and scroll down to the Sy
263. r selects the parameter for edit After the parameter has been modified the Enter button locks in the new variable and releases the buttons for other operations 2 When the 5062 is placed in Triggered run mode the Man Trig button can be used to manually trigger the 5062 7 Cursor UP Down Left and Right Has two functions 1 When multiple parameters are displayed on the screen the cursor and the dial scroll through the parameters 2 When parameter is selected for editing cursor buttons right or left move the cursor accordingly Cursor buttons up or down modify parameter value accordingly 8 Dial Has similar functionality as the cursor UP and Down keys 9 Numeral keypad These keys are used for modifying an edited parameter value 10 Parameter Suffixes M k x1 and m These keys are used to place suffix at the end of the parameter They are also used for terminating an edit operation 11 Program CH1 CH2 Use Program CH1 to modify the screen to display channel 1 parameters Use Program CH2 to 3 6 Using the Instrument Controlling the 5062 3 modify the screen to display channel 2 parameters These keys can be used only when the 5062 is not in edit mode 12 ON OFF Output Sync These keys can be used only when the 5062 is not in edit mode The Output ON OFF toggles output waveform at the output connector ON and OFF The Sync ON OFF toggles the sync waveform at the SYNC output connector ON and
264. rain is to set the design parameters in the options menu that will determine the way that the pulse will be distributed in your waveform memory Click on View Options and refer to Figure 4 36 throughout the following description 10 xi felp Current J En View Fui Train DI SZ F lon og Mode of Operation Memory Management Freely Select Mode of Operation C Do not Override Loaded Segments Force Pulse Train to Single Segment e Allow Pulse Design with no Arbitrary Waveform Mode Limitation Force Pulse Sections to Multiple Segments Sequenced Waveform Mode r Pulse Transition Management Design Units Time units ms sl Level Units v y C Limit Increments fe Allow System Control Cancel Pulse currently not specified Setting the Pulse Editor Options 4 62 Figure 4 36 Selecting Pulse Editor Options As shown in Figure 4 36 the pulse editor option dialog box is divided to functional groups Mode of operation Design Units Memory Management and Pulse Transition Management These groups are described below Mode of Operation There are three options in the mode of operation group The force pulse train to single segment option is recommended if you are using one pulse section only In this case the pulse waveform will occupy one segment only and the generator will ArbConnection 4 automatically be set to operate in arbitrary mode The force pulse sections to mu
265. rbitrary waveform generation techniques In general arbitrary waveforms are made of waveform data and sample clock The rate of the sample clock determines the frequency of the output waveform For example if your sample clock is 1MS s and your waveform segment is 1000 points long the frequency of the waveform is 1M 1000 1kHz The above example is somewhat oversimplified What is important to remember is that regardless if you are generating standard or arbitrary waveforms the FM function modulates the sample clock and the parameters that you program for FM affects the SINE OUT signal directly while the frequency characteristics for the front panel outputs must be computed In Frequency Shift Keying FSK the output of the 5062 hops between two sample clock settings Carrier Frequency and Shifted Frequency Carrier frequency is the value of the sample clock frequency as programmed for the arbitrary waveform Indirectly it is the sample clock that is being automatically set when you select the frequency for the standard waveform FSK control is done from the rear panel FSK IN This input is level sensitive When the FSK IN signal is low the output generates carrier sample clock changing the level to high modifies the output to shifted sample clock FSK effects the sample clock frequency directly and indirectly the frequency of the output waveform If you are just using sine waveforms then we recommend that you use the rear panel S
266. reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Arbitrary amp The Arbitrary amp Sequence panel as shown in Figure 4 5 is invoked Sequence Panel by pressing the ARB button on the Panels bar Note that if you invoke the Arbitrary amp Sequence Panel from the Panels menu the 5062 will not change its output type On the other hand if you select the arbitrary or the sequenced options from the Main Panel the 5062 will immediately change its output to the selected waveform type The functional groups in the Arbitrary Waveforms Panel are described below Parameters The Parameters group contains two parameters for each channel Amplitude and Offset Actually the values exhibited in this group are exactly the same as in the Main Panel so every time you change amplitude and offset in the Parameters group the other panels are updated automatica
267. red to continuous when the 5062 is set to single sequence advance or changing the operating mode from continuous to triggered when the 5062 is set to automatic sequence advance mode Corrective action Observe the 5062 advance mode while setting sequence advance 222 Data out of range Parameter data which followed a specific header could not be used because its value is outside the valid range defined by the generator 224 lllegal parameter value A discrete parameter was received which was not a valid choice for the command An invalid parameter choice may have been used 300 Device specific error This is the generic device dependent error for the instrument when it cannot detect more specific errors A device specific error as defined in IEEE 488 2 has occurred 311 Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the instrument s memory For example if memory size exceeds the minimum or maximum allowable memory size limits 350 Queue Overflow The error queue is full because more than 30 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until the errors from the queue are removed The error queue is cleared when power has been shut off or after a CLS command has been executed 410 Query INTERRUPTED A command was received which sends data to the output buffer but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is not overwritten The output buffer is cle
268. reen running across the 0 vertical point Y REMEMBER The equation must be a function of a single variable and that variable must be directly related to the Horizontal axis Scale setting Now try this Amplitude p sin omg p Still no good but now press the Adjust button and here is your sinewave So what s wrong Well if you ll give it a little amplitude it might help so do it now exactly as follows Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p There you go You should now see a perfect sine waveform with a period of 1000 points This is because you have asked the Equation Editor to compute the sine along p points p is the equation variable remember If you want to create 10 sine waveforms you should multiply p by 10 Try this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p 10 So far you have learned how to create two simple waveforms straight lines and trigonometric functions Lets see if we can combine these waveforms to something more interesting Take the straight line equation and add it to the sinewave equation Amplitude p 3000 sin omg p 0 8 p 4000 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure 4 24 ArbConnection 4 S11 767 Figure 4 24 An Equation Editor Example Now let s try to modulate two sine waves with different periods and different start phase Type this Amplitude p 8000 sin omg p cos omg p 30 Press Preview Your screen should look like Figure
269. rements and set a pre defined number of increments you manually control how many waveform points will be dedicated for transitions however if you are not sure what is the optimum number of increments select the allow system control option for the program to make the transitions efficient in terms of memory usage and slope smoothness After you complete setting the pulse editor options point and click on OK 4 63 5061 5062 User Manual Using the Pulse The prime tool for building pulse patterns on the pulse composer Editor screen is the pulse editor To invoke the pulse editor point and click on the pulse editor icon on the tools bar The editor as shown in Figure 4 37 will show Refer to this figure for the following descriptions 101 x e Gurren Ve 2 5 oen Fuman SZ Z om che Edi File Edit Vie 058 Pulse Train Design Format Time Level Points Append iriser Delete Delete All Undo m Section Properties al Design Units Y ms Section Start O ms Repeat 1 Apply Duration R Oms Pulse currently not specified Figure 4 37 Using the Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor as shown in Figure 4 37 has four groups Section Structure Pulse Train Design Format Section Properties and control buttons These groups are described below Pulse Train Design Format There are two methods or formats that can be use for designing the pulse shape DC Intervals and T
270. rigonometric functions similar to the example given below If you want to use waveforms in your equations you must first generate these waves and store them on your hard disk You identify waveforms by adding the wav extension as shown in the example below Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 10 Noise wav 1000 The above equation will generate amplitude modulated waveform with added noise The following steps demonstrate how to create store and combine waveforms using this equation Step 1 Create and store sine wav Invoke the Equation Editor and type the following equation Ampl p 4000 sin omg p Press OK and then select the Save Waveform As from the File command Save this file using the name Sine wav Step 2 Create and store Noise wav From the Wave command select Noise Click OK and watch your waveform screen draw noisy signal From the File menu select Save Waveform As and save this waveform using 4 53 5061 5062 User Manual the name Noise wav Step 3 Write and compute the original equation Amplitude p Sine wav sin omg p 5 Noise wav 10 If you did not make any mistakes your waveform screen should look as shown in Figure 4 29 Figure 4 29 Combining Waveforms into Equations 4 54 ArbConnection 4 The Pulse Composer is a great tool for creating and editing pulses The Pulse without the need to think about sample clock number of points and Composer complex equations Pulses are creat
271. riting your equations Equation syntax and conventions are discussed in the following paragraphs The Remove button clears the equation field so you can start typing a new equation Click on the Store button to store your equation if you intend to use it again The Browse button provides access to waveform pre stored files in your computer for combining them in new equations The Operands button expands the bottom of the dialog box to show the operands you can use with your equation While you type and store equations they are collected in a history file and can be used again by expanding the history log from the equation field Control Buttons There are four control buttons at the right corner of the dialog box Use the Preview button to preview an image of your equation or use the OK button to place your waveform on the waveform screen and to leave the dialog box on the screen The Default button restores the parameters in the equation editor to their original factory default values The Cancel button will remove the dialog box from the screen and will discard of any waveforms that you 4 45 5061 5062 User Manual Writing Equations Equation Conventions 4 46 previewed with your Equation Editor The Equation Editor lets you process mathematical expressions and convert them into waveform coordinates As you probably already know waveforms are made of vertical samples The number of samples on your waveform is determined by the
272. rms that modulate the carrier sample clock frequency with know and pre defined parameters Throughout the description in this manual this modulation type will be referred to as Standard FM Mode 2 Arbitrary is a special case of modulating waveform where the waveform is not actually resident in the instrument until downloaded from a remote interface to a special and dedicated modulating waveform memory You may create and download the modulating waveform using external utilities such as Tabor Electronics or any similar application that can generate mathematical coordinates Throughout the description in this manual this modulation type will be referred to as Arbitrary FM Mode The arbitrary waveform you will create and download to the 5062 resides in a separate and dedicated memory It can be programmed to have variable length 10 to 20000 points and has a separate and independent sample clock control 9 digits 1mS s to 2MS s The equivalent minimum and maximum modulating frequencies you can generate with the arbitrary FM are 50nHz to 200kHz While the low frequency is very useful in applications like wander and slow drifting oscillators the higher frequencies are as much needed for testing fast modems PLL circuits and for wide band digital modulation technology FM Frequency Defines the rate of the modulating frequency If you use the standard FM mode the maximum modulating frequency is 100kHz Using the arbitrary FM
273. rns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the HI keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new setting ei Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the LW120 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator setting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let 4 25 5061 5062 User Manual Step Direction Run Mode Trig Slope The Utility Panel 4 26 you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting Use these keys to select sweep step from two increment options linear or logarithmic Use these keys to program sweep direction Up select sweep from Start to Stop sample clock setting and Down selects sweep from the Stop to Start sample clock setting Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual to learn more about sweep operation The Run Mode keys define how the generator sweeps You have
274. rovide sufficient range for the backwards peak deviation range Cycles The Cycles parameter defines how many sine cycles will be created within the specified start and end anchor points The example below shows three sine cycles Start Phase The start phase parameter defines the angle of which the sine will start The example shows 0 start phase Power Sine to the power of 1 will generate a perfect sine Power range is from 1 through 9 4 43 5061 5062 User Manual Generating Waveforms Using the Equation Editor Equation Editor One of the most powerful feature within ArbConnection and probably the feature that will be used most is the Equation Editor The Equation Editor let you write equations the same way as you would do on a blank piece of paper The equations are then translated to sequential points that form waveforms and are displayed on the waveform screen The Equation Editor will detect and inform you on syntax errors and with its self adjusting feature will automatically adjust your parameters so that none of the points on your waveform will exceed the maximum scale limits When you invoke the Equation Editor the dialog box as shown in Figure 4 23 will display Use the following paragraphs to learn how to use this dialog box and how to write your equations gt Anchor m Waveform Amplitude gt m Level Adjuster Pena Start pts fo Max Jos Cycles Manual Scale EE
275. s 6 11 Trigger OP SPAIN ics A A A ae tals oa A a AAA e esas 6 12 Trigger Gate and Burst EE 6 12 Rue ee 6 12 A aa o 6 13 Internal Trigger ACCUTaACY ged adarei taideen 6 14 Sequence Operation cccccccececccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeeeeseseeaaenseees 6 15 Automatic Advance 6 15 Ee Re Wee 6 16 Single AAV E 6 17 Modulated Waveforms Characteristics oooooocccncccnnoccconcccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnns 6 18 e an T TEATS 6 18 6 1 5061 5062 6 2 User Manual Ramped EE 6 19 DWE NEE 6 19 FM Std Waveiorms 6 21 FIM Arb WAVETONMNS isidro 6 22 AM seed eeh eeh eo Sack once cda 6 23 te TOES un E 6 24 uge ie Le AAA A O O T 6 24 DESCH PMO EE 6 24 Environmental Conditions 6 24 Required Equipment ccccccceccceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaesaaeeeeeeeeceaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaseeeeseseeseaaaes 6 24 Initiallinstrument e EE 6 25 Adj stment ee 6 25 DDS Duty Cycle Adjustment usina e 6 25 Sine Out Offset AdjuStMent ococoococornnccnccocccoconococonoconcnncococennncnnncnncanicennninnas 6 25 TCXO Frequency Adjustment eeaeee eeann eenean Eae EEN 6 25 Channel 1 Amplitude and Balance Adiustment 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Fine Adjustment 2 cece eecce cee eneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaees 6 26 Channel 1 Offset Adjustment oooooooocccccncccccconccnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnncnnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 6 27 Channel 1 Offset Compensation n 0nnnn00nnneneaa
276. s lines and accepts 8 bit words only Therefore the data has to be prepared as 40 bit words and rearranged as five 8 bit words before it can be used by the 5062 as FM modulating waveform data 5 21 5061 5062 User Manual There are a number of points you should be aware of before you start preparing the data mk The FM function is shared by both channels 2 The number of bytes in a complete FM modulating waveform data must divide by 5 The Model 5062 has no control over data sent to its FM waveform during data transfer Therefore wrong data and or incorrect number of bytes will cause errors 3 The LSBit on the last byte sets marker position 0 sets no marker and 1 sets marker You can set as many markers as you want 4 The SYNC output serves as marker output when you have the 5062 set to operate in FM mode Normal SYNC level is TTL low The SYNC output is set to TTL high when the marker bit is true This way you can use the SYNC output to mark frequency occurrences during FM operation 5 Data download is terminated with the MSBit of the last byte set to 1 The following sequence should be used for downloading arbitrary FM Waveforms 1 Prepare your FM waveform data points using the following relationship N SCLK Hz x 14 31655765 Convert the result from 1 above to 4 byte 32 bit binary word and union with an 8 bit control word Use an I O routine such as ViMoveAsync from the VISA I O library to transfer binary bloc
277. s not important and spaces are ignored Numbers are entered in scientific notation All calculations are done with double digit precision For the trigonometric functions all angles are expressed in radians A number of constants are provided e which is the base of the natural logarithm pi which is the circumference of a unit diameter circle per which equals the programmed horizontal range f which equals 1 per omg which equals 2 pi per and numerals in the range of 1E 20 to 1E 20 There are three classes of precedence raise to power has the highest precedence multiply and divide come second and have the lowest precedence Parentheses may be used to change the order of precedence The following table summarize the mathematical expressions and their respective abbreviated commands that can be used with the Equation Editor Typing Equations ArbConnection 4 Equation Editor Operands A Raise to the power J Multiply Divide Add A Subtract Parentheses e Base of natural Logarithm pi Gr Circumference of unit diameter circle per Horizontal wavelength in points f l per omg Q 2 n per amp Amplitude in units of points or seconds sin x The sine of x cos x The cosine of x tan x The tangent of x ctn x The cotangent of x log x The base IO logarithm of x In x The natural base e logarithm of x abs x The absolute value of x 1E420 lt gt 1E 20 Numerals equation constants
278. s shown below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters The uppercase letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability use the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms Use upper or lowercase letters Therefore FREQ FREQUENCY freq and Freq are all acceptable Other forms such as FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error The above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangular brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string A value for the frequency parameter such as FREQ 50e 6 must be specified Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN A semicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing For example sending the following command string TRIG SLOP NEG COUN 10 TIM 5e 3 is the same as sending the following three commands TRIG SLOP NEG TRIG COUN 10 TRIG TIM 5e 3 Use the colon and
279. s to achieve synchronization is not enough because it will generate a jitter of 1 count Multi instrument synchronization is built into the 5062 where special connectors and cables were designed to eliminate jitter and to provide start phase control There is not limit to the number of 5062 s_ that can be daisy chained multiple instrument Remote Control Safety Considerations Supplied Accessories Specifications Functional Description Getting Started 1 Safety Considerations synchronization is built into each instrument The 5062 must be programmed to generate waveforms Therefore it is recommended that the user becomes familiar with its basic features functions and programming concepts as described in this and the following chapters The instrument has been manufactured according to international safety standards The instrument meets EN61010 VDE 0411 03 81 and UL 1244 standards for safety of commercial electronic measuring and test equipment for instruments with an exposed metal chassis that is directly connected to earth via the chassis power supply cable A WARNING Do not remove instrument covers when operating or when the power cord is connected to the mains Any adjustment maintenance and repair of an opened powered on instrument should be avoided as much as possible but when necessary should be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved The instrument is supplied with
280. s used for placing straight line segments on the screen in intervals that define pulse width rise fall times and amplitude Information how to use the pulse editor to create pulse trains is given later in this chapter Full Train The view Full Train shows on the pulse screen all sections of the pulse train Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Pulse Train Design Format DC Intervals Time Level Points Ss L Append Insert Delete Delete All Unda Section Properties Design Units W ms Section Start 16 ms Repeat 3 Duration x R Oms Apply Figure 4 31 The Pulse Editor ArbConnection 4 Single Section The view Single Section shows on the pulse screen one section at a time Eventually when all pulse sections have been designed the entire pulse train as shown when the Full Train option has been selected will be downloaded to the instrument as a single waveform Channel 1 The view Channel 1 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 1 pulse train If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 1 the waveform screen will show a clear display Channel 2 The view Channel 2 command updates the waveform screen with the Channel 2 pulse train If you have not yet generated a waveform for channel 2 the
281. separately and independently at a breakpoint uniquely programmed for each channel H breakpoint has not been programmed the waveform will stop after the last point Rear Panel Trigger Input BNC USB ENET or GPIB commands 1 Sample Clock 150ns Waveform dependent 9 digits limited by 1uHz Same as internal SCLK reference Same as internal SCLK reference 100uHz to 25MHz 5 to 10MHz 20 to 50MHz Start phase 0 to 360 1004 Hz to 7 5MHz usable above 7 5MHz Start phase 0 to 360 100uHz to 25MHz Duty cycle 1 to 99 100u4Hz to 7 2MHz usable above 7 5MHz 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period 0 to 99 9 of period Sinc Sine x x Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Cycles Gaussian Pulse Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Time Constant Exponential Decaying Rising Pulse Frequency Range Adjustable Parameters Time Constant DC Range ARBITRARY WAVEFORMS Waveform Memory Memory Segmentation Number of Segments Min Segment Size Memory Interleave Vertical Resolution Waveform Download Sine Wave Performance Description Sinewave Total Harmonic Distortion Harmonics and non related spurious below 10MHz Appendices A Specifications 100u4Hz to 3 125 MHz usable above 3 125 MHz 4 to 100 cycles 100u4Hz to 3 125 MHz usable above 3 125 MHz 10 to 200 100u4Hz to 3 125 MHz usable above 3 125 MHz 100 to 100 100 to 100 of amplitude 512k points standard 1 M
282. serve the File Transfer Progress bar Click on Back to close NETConfig Firmware Update dialog box and turn off the power to the 5062 The next time you power up the instrument the device automatically reboots with the new firmware in effect Maintenance and Performance Checks Updating 5062 Firmware gt TE NETConfig Firmware Update e SE H Firmware VU poate Ethernet Addres y Figure 6 4 Firmware update Path 6 33 5061 5062 User Manual 6 34 Appendices Appendix Title Page A lee Men EE A 1 506 1 5062 User Manual Configuration Output Channels Inter Channel Control Leading Edge Offset Description Offset Units Range Resolution and Accuracy Initial Skew Appendix A Specifications 2 semi independent Channel 2 edge trails channel 1 edge by a programmable number of points Waveform points 0 to 512k points 1 Meg Optional 1 point or 1 sample clock period of channel 2 lt 2ns with sclk divider 1 Channel 2 Sample Clock Divider Description Range Resolution Inter Channel Dependency Separate controls Common Controls Multiple Instrument synchronization Description Leading Edge Offset Description Phase Units Range The sample clock source is common to both channels 1 and 2 The sample clock for the slave channel can be divided down coherently from 1 to 64k 1 to 65 535 y Output on off amplitude AM offset standard waveforms user wavefor
283. set to 1 the sequence generator will advance to the next step only when a valid trigger signal will be sensed at the trigger input SEQuence ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed Purpose This command will select the sequence advance mode The way the instrument advances through the sequence links can be specified by the user e AUTOmatic specifies continuous advance where the generator steps continuously to the end of the sequence table and repeats the sequence from the start For example if a sequence is made of three segments 1 2 and 3 the sequence will generate an infinite number of 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 waveforms Of course each link segment can be programmed with its associated loop repeat number AUTO is the default sequence advance mode e In STEP advance mode the sequence is advanced to the next waveform only when a valid trigger is received The output of the 5062 generates the first segment continuously until a trigger signal advances the sequence to the next segment If repeats were selected for a segment the loop counter is executed automatically e In SINGle advance mode the generator idles between steps until a valid trigger signal is sensed This mode operates with trigger mode only An attempt to select the SING advance mode when the 5062 is in continuous operating mode will generate an error After trigger the generator outputs one waveform cycle Then the output level idles at a DC level equal to the last po
284. solution Accuracy Filters Square Wave Pulse Rise Fall time Aberration SYNC Marker Output A 6 Description Connector Impedance Level Protection Validators Position Width Control Range Resolution Source Current segment is sampled to the end of the segment including repeats and idles there Next trigger advances to next segment Control input is TRIG IN connector Each step of a sequence can be programmed to advance either a automatically Automatic Sequence Advance or b with a trigger Stepped Sequence Advance External rear panel BNC Internal GPIB From 1 to 2048 From 1 to 512k 1 Meg optional Minimum 1s for more than one loop Front panel BNC Output Off or Normal 50Q 1 Protected against temporary short to case ground 10mV to 10Vp p into 50Q Double into open circuit 3 5 digits 1 25mV 1 000V to 10Vp p 1 5mV 100mV to 999 9mVp p 1 2mV 10mV to 99 99mVp p Offset is independent to amplitude setting as long as lamplitude 2 offset does not exceed 5Vp p 0 to 4 5V 6 digits 1 12 MHz Elliptic 25 MHz Elliptic lt 10 ns 10 to 90 of amplitude lt 5 Provides dual functionality All functions and modes this output generates sync pulse which is synchronous with the output waveform In FM and sweep modes only this output generates a marker at designated sample clock frequencies Front panel BNC 50Q 1 gt 2V into 50Q 4V nominal into 10kQ Protected a
285. solution of 7 digits The Model 5062 generates arbitrary waveforms with 14 bits of vertical resolution Any waveform it generates must first be downloaded to waveform memory The arbitrary waveform memory is a bank of 14 bit words Each word represents a point on 1 7 5061 5062 User Manual 1 8 Memory Segmentation Frequency Agility Multi Instrument Synchronization the horizontal waveform scale Each word has a horizontal address that can range from 0 to 4 191 280 and a vertical address that can range from 8192 to 8191 14 bits Using a high speed clocking circuit the digital contents of the arbitrary waveform memory are extracted and routed to the Digital to Analog Converter DAC The DAC converts the digital data to an analog signal and the output amplifier completes the task by amplifying or attenuating the signal at the output connector There is no need to use the complete memory every time an arbitrary waveform is generated Waveform memory can be divided into up to 2048 smaller segments and different waveforms can be loaded into each segment The various segments may then be loaded into a sequence table to generate long and complex waveforms The sequence table can link up to 2048 segments while each segment can loop up to 1 million times The instrument must be used in conjunction with a host computer All of its functions modes and parameters are fully programmable using SCPI commands and syntax There are three
286. st way to restore the generator to a known state is by resetting the instrument to factory defaults Observe Figure 3 1 and reset parameters to factory defaults as follows 1 Press the Utilities soft key 2 Scroll down to the or 3 Press button 3 to restore factory defaults Table 3 1 summarizes factory defaults for the most common parameters A complete list of all parameters their defaults as well as their maximum and minimum values is given in Chapter 4 PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR 4145062 o fourrur sync desse alee ae Utility gt ds Setup Multi Inst Sync BASE MODE SU Q MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC ARB TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 o K e D O RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE am E am O O O A A son son Figure 3 1 Reset 5062 to Factory Defaults Controlling the 5062 Using the Instrument 3 Controlling the 5062 Table 3 1 Default Conditions After Reset Function Parameter Default Inter Channel Dependency Output State Off Separate Operating Mode Common SYNC State Common Output Function Separate Output Function Shape Separate Standard Wave Frequency Common User Wave Sample Clock Common Sample Clock Source amp Reference Common Channel 2 Clock Divider Separate Amplitude Separate Offset Separate Filter State Separate Filter Type Separate Trigger Slope Common Internal Trigger Rate Common Modulat
287. stem option Press Enter and the screen will show with the system information Check both the Software Version and the Version Date as both should match with the latest release PROGRAM ON OFF AAA 100MS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW1072 Fon cH2 foureut SYNC e Se OO 0000666 S Software Version 1 11 ersion Date 13 Apr 2005 17 11 e 9 Calibration Date Not calibrated Installed Memory 1M Pts per channel es Lo D Q Settings Clock Source _ Brightness Level 10 MHz EXT l ook Dial Direction Forward SCLK MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG ExT di ena d O Figure 6 1 Software Version Screen BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM COFFI FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION amp SLOPE POSITIVE Maintenance and Performance Checks Updating 5062 Firmware ei NOTE Firmware updates are performed with the LAN set as the active interface and with the 5062 communicating with the PC through the network To update the 5062 firmware you will have to run the NETConfig utility If you do not have this utility installed on your computer run the installation procedure from the enclosed CD You will not be able to update firmware without the NETConfig utility To invoke this utility complete the following steps 1 Power on your device 2 Click on NETConfig shortcut on the desktop or select Start Programs Tabor Electronics NETConfig NETConfig 1 0 The NETConfig w
288. stment TCXO Frequency Adjustment Maintenance and Performance Checks Initial Instrument Setting To avoid confusion as to what initial setting is to be used for each calibration it is required that the instrument be reset to factory default values prior to each adjustment Use the following procedures to calibrate the Model 5062 The following paragraphs show how to set up the instrument for calibration and what the acceptable calibration limits are Equipment Oscilloscope 500Q probe Procedure 1 Modify 5062 Waveform to Arbitrary and set SCLK to 50MS s 2 Connect a 5000 probe to U50 pin 17 and adjust RV13 DUTY CYCLE for a approximately 50 duty cycle waveform 3 Connect the probe to U50 pin 20 and re adjust RV13 for approximately 50 duty cycle waveform 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you achieve the smallest error at these two points Equipment DMM BNC to BNC cable Dual banana to BNC adapter Procedure 1 Modify 5062 frequency setting to 1kHz 2 Modify the DMM setting to DCV 2V measurements and connect the rear panel SINE OUT connector to the DMM input 3 Adjust RV12 SINE OFFS for OV 5 mV reading Equipment Counter 10MHz External Reference BNC to BNC cable Procedure 1 Modify 5062 frequency setting to 10 00000MHz amplitude to 2V and output function to square waveform 2 Modify the counter setting to frequency measurements and connect the front panel CHAN 1 connector to the counter input Use externa
289. t lt seg gt lt sc NAN KR A A AA A lt phase_offs OFF ON 0O 1 lt header gt lt b lt deviation gt FIXed USER SINusoid T lt FM_freq gt lt FM_sclk gt CONTinuous lt freq gt MIN lt sclk gt MIN EXTernal I lt divider gt OFF ON 0 1 lt FSK_sclk gt HOP RAMP lt time gt POSitive N Default Low Limit High OFF fs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt high gt lt fall gt pl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt pl gt lt offs gt lt phase gt pl gt lt offs gt lt duty_cycle gt pl gt lt of pl gt lt offs gt lt delay gt lt rise gt lt fall gt pl gt lt offs gt lt N_cycles gt pl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt pl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt 1k gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt gt inary_block gt Rlangle SQUare RAMP TRIGgered GATed EGative imum MAXimum imum MAXimum NTernal FIXed USER SEQuence SINusoid T SINC EXPon INTernal E OFF ON 0 1 lt stop_sclk gt lt time gt Rlangle SQUare PULSe RAMP 0 0 1M OFF le6 100e 3 50e6 FIXed SINusoid 1e3 1e 3 100e3 le6 1le 3 2e6 CONTinuous POSitive le6 100e 6 25e6 10e6 100e 3 50e6 INTernal 1 1765535 OFF 40e6 100e 3 50e6 HOP le 3 10e 6 1 FIXed ential GAUSsian NOISe DC SINusoid XTernal INTernal OFF 20e6 100e 3 50e6 le 3 1e 3 1000 DIRection SPACing
290. t Wnts ae teed ont das 3 3 Gontrolling TG SOG 2 acosada las 3 5 Enabling the Output E 3 8 Selecting a Waveform Type 3 9 Changing the Output E E 3 10 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency ENNEN 3 11 Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 2 3 12 Programming the Amplitude and Offset 3 13 Selecting a Run Mode EE 3 15 TSE Mod E 3 16 Gated Mode tii eerie ape EE EE 3 17 BUISU dee 3 18 Using Ihe und E 3 19 Using the Manual Tigger ss ea 3 20 Using the SYNC Output ER 3 20 APPO EE 3 21 Selecting the SCLK Source and Heterence AAR 3 21 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms sucia iaa 3 22 What Are Arbitrary WaveforMs ooooonccccccocccocococonononononononononcnnnconononononnonnnnnnononanonnnnnnnn 3 23 Generating Arbitrary En EE 3 24 Generating Sequenced Waveforms AEN 3 26 What Are Sequenced WE te EE 3 27 Editing the Sequenc Fable ci Ai aaa EE 3 29 Selecting Sequence Advance Modes c cccsscccseseecseeeeessecersennessteneeensnsesteneneneees 3 30 Generating Modulated Waveforms kA 3 32 FM MOGUIALION a A ege 3 33 Example 1 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Standard FM Mode 3 35 Example 2 Modulating Standard Waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 36 Example 3 Modulating Arbitrary waveforms Using the Arbitrary FM Mode 3 39 PSIG at heels Pu E stacrees ob E E E AA ultver erat tatenuies 3 39 Example 1 FSK Using Standard Wavetomms 3 41 Example 2 FSK Using Arbitrary Wavetommzs cnn nnnnnnnos 3 42 S
291. t download waveforms to the instrument generate a sequence table and download the sequence table to the instrument Sequences are generated easily using the waveform Studio as shown in Figure 3 18 Note that different sequences can be generated for each channel Detailed information on the structure of the arbitrary waveform and the commands that are needed to download arbitrary waveforms to the 5062 is given in Chapter 5 There you can also find information how to create and download sequence tables using SCPI programming commands Information in this chapter will give you some general idea what sequenced waveforms are all about Waveform Studio lt Channel 1 gt x Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms 3 1 Seament table File name m Sequence table Append 5 Link Seg Loops Adv Mapped Ch A rbE vplorer 2Mot T em wat eeh e 3 0 Delete 2 2 23 0 3 7 2 0 Channel 1 Channel d 1024 Download Waveform Shape lt segment 1 gt Figure 3 18 Using Tabor Electronics to Generate Sequences What Are Sequenced Sequenced waveforms are constructed from two or more arbitrary Waveforms waveforms which are linked and looped in any way you can imagine as long as you observe the limitations set forth in the specification section of this manual The first thing to do before you can generate sequenced waveforms is download w
292. t the top of the screen Make your selection and click OK The Startup amp Communication Updater dialog box will be removed from the screen And the Main panel will now be accessible But before we go into panel operation let s look at the toolbars at the left top of the screen as shown in Figure 4 2 Link fwws062 offline J D0 amp a Panels MAIN STD ARB TRIG MOD1 MOD2 UTIL WAVE FM PULSE Figure 4 2 ArbConnection s Toolbars 4 5 5061 5062 User Manual ArbConnection Features The Control Panels 4 6 The standard Windows Menu Bar is the top bar It provides access to main system controls like saving files and viewing or removal of screen images The second bar is called Link bar It provides direct access to different instruments that are active on the active interface bus ArbConnection can control a number of 5062 units simultaneously If the instruments were connected to the interface while invoking ArbConnection they will automatically be detected by the program and will be placed in the Link pull down window The active instrument is displayed with its associated address If you run ArbConnection in offline mode the Link bar will show 5062 Offline The Panels bar provides direct access to instrument control panels The individual control panels are explained later in this chapter The MAIN STD ARB TRIG MOD1 and the other buttons will bring up to the screen panels that ar
293. tart generating waves with exactly the same start phase Further control of leading edge offset between channels is also provided The same input is used in FSK mode where the output hops between two frequencies carrier and shifted frequencies The output generates carrier frequency when the FSK input is false and shifted frequency when the FSK input is true The trigger input is also used as stop and start input when the 5062 is placed in Arm mode 5061 5062 User Manual SINE OUT REF IN SCLK OUT SCLK IN MASTER SLAVE This BNC connector outputs dc coupled fixed level 1Vpk pk into 50Q sine waveforms This output is derived directly from the sample clock generator and is active at all times regardless of present operating mode of the 5062 The frequency of the sine output is programmed using the sample clock parameter Frequency agility and modulation affect this output directly The sine waveform output is programmed to 50MHz so it may serve as an additional output to those available on the front panel This BNC connector accepts 10MHz TTL level reference signal The external reference input is available for those applications requiring better accuracy and stability reference than the one provided inside the 5062 The reference input is active only after selecting the external reference source mode This SMB connector outputs the programmed sample clock frequency Output level is ECL terminated into 50Q to 2V No
294. te that correct termination is necessary for this output otherwise you will not see this signal at all This output generates sample clock waveforms continuously regardless if the 5062 is operating in continuous trigger or gated modes The sample clock output is used for multiple instruments synchronization In master mode connect this output with an SMB to SNB connector to the adjacent slave instrument You may also use this output to synchronize other components in your system to one master clock This SMB connector accepts ECL level signal terminated into 50Q to 2V The external clock input is available for those applications requiring synchronization to one sample clock source Normally this input is disabled When enabled the clock at this input replaces the internal clock generator and the 5062 generates waveforms having the external sample clock rate The sample clock output is also used for multiple instruments synchronization In slave mode connect this input with an SMB to SMB connector to the adjacent master instrument This 9 pin D connector is used when connecting master to slave units The master slave cable is supplied with your instrument The master slave mode must be activated from the front panel otherwise this connector and the cable attached to it will have no affect on normal operation of the 5062 LAN USB GPIB AC LINE AC FUSE Run Modes Getting Started 1 Functional Description T
295. ter Make sure you use the settings for the LAN adapter you are using to communicate with the LAN device e For Windows 95 1 Open a DOS prompt 2 Type WINIPCFG 3 Press lt Enter gt Select the Ethernet adapters you are using to communicate with the Ethernet device from the drop down list 2 5061 5062 User Manual 2 18 Chapter 3 Using the Instrument Title Page EENEG 3 3 Inter Channel Depende acuatico nilo blica Vico SEgeEei z 3 3 lie eat UI 3 3 A ae St Vs eet ala the th tht AN a eee hat a aac 3 3 Power Dn Reset Defaults ssr iesen ek EE AENA OKKA RE AEKA Kinakanta ida 3 3 Controlling the BOOZ sacri fete ee EE SA ena 3 5 Enabling the ee TE 3 8 Selecting a Waveform EE e 3 9 Changing the Output Frequency cccceccecenneecneecteeeneesneeeneesnaeeneenneeaeneneenneneeeeenenes 3 10 Changing the Sample Clock Freoguency 3 11 Dividing the Sample Clock for Channel 7 3 12 Programming the Amplitude and Offset oooooiicinnoninonnonccccc nenne nannan n n nnneneena 3 13 Selecting a Run Mode saco incapacidad Ae e agedee 3 15 A carpi ia TTT 3 16 Gated e 3 17 Burst Meecher EN EE od 3 18 Using the Arm Feature cla lan cairo cblenebeesnce 3 19 Using the Manual Trigger ENEE a ee dE a ieee 3 20 Using the SYNC erte 3 20 Applying EE 3 21 Selecting the SCLK Source and Reference eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeereeeeeeeereerereeet 3 22 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms ccccsscnececneeneeecneeneee
296. ters There are four parameters you can adjust for this function State Turns the SYNC output on and off Note that the termination of the output state shifts the dc level to OV but leaves a low impedance path to the connector and therefore if your UUT unit under test is sensitive to level transitions make sure you remove the cable from this connector before turning the output state off Type Provides selection between two types of signals BIT and LCOM The BIT mode is recommended to be used in standard and arbitrary modes only The sync output generates a single sync signal with every waveform cycle The LCOM loop complete option generates a sync signal in sequenced mode only The signal starts with the selected active segment and stops only after the sequence loop has completed Position Lets you place the sync bit at any point along the length of the waveform Placement resolution is 4 points As default the sync signal is positioned at the beginning of the waveform Position value is ignored when you select LCOM Width Programs the width of the sync signal as percent of the output period Width resolution is 4 points Width value is ignored when you select LCOM The SYNC parameters are shown in Figure 3 14 The Menu is accessible by selecting the Outputs soft key as shown in Figure 3 3 Two filters are available for each channel These filters have fixed cutoff frequencies of which their properties are specified in
297. the entire waveform memory into the required segment sizes Want to use it Here is how it is done Point and click on the Memory Partition A dialog box as shown in Figure 4 6 will pop up 4 13 506 1 5062 User Manual 4 14 x SegmNo SegmentSize Append 1000 Insert 2000 436 Dege 24 Clear All H GAbA Cancel Figure 4 6 The Memory Partition Table The two main fields in the segment table are Segment number and segment size The Seg No segment number is an index field that can has values only from 1 to 2048 The Segment Size is always associated with the segment number You can program any segment size from 16 to 1M Use the Append key to add a segment at the end of the segment list If you highlighted a segment the Append key turns automatically to insert Use the Insert key to insert a segment at the cursor location The Delete key is used for deleting a segment at the cursor position The Clear All key will remove all segments from the table and will let you start designing your segment table from fresh Click on the Close to discard of the contents of the dialog box without saving your last actions and to remove the Segment Table from the screen The Save key saves the current session so you can start the Memory Partition table from the same point after you close this session The Download key updates the 5062 with the present segment table settings Y TIP The Memory Partiti
298. the new value Alternately after you display the edit field you may use the dial and or the arrow keys to modify the field then press Enter to lock in the new value If you did not make programming errors and did not make any mistake while downloading your waveform segment s then the output should generate your desired waveform There are seven parameters that are available for programming in this window View Table Provides access to a sequence table If no table was yet defined you can define the sequence table from this menu You can also edit an existing sequence table from this command Information on editing the sequence table is given later Advance Mode Defines the advance mode for the sequence There are four advance mode options you can select from Automatic Stepped Single and Mixed Descriptions of the various advance modes is given later Note that advance mode depend on run mode and therefore if you selected continuous run mode for the 5062 you will not see the Single advance mode in the advance mode options list Similarly if you selected triggered run mode Stepped and Mixed will be omitted from the list Advance Source Defines which of the triggers inputs will advance the sequence The advance source has no effect on Automatic advance source Sample Clock Programs the sample clock frequency for the sequenced waveform The final period of the complete sequence can be extracted from the following re
299. tifies the entire pulse design When downloading the waveform to the instrument the entire pulse train will be downloaded regardless if part of the pulse train is displayed on the pulse composer screen Pulse Section Pulse train is constructed from 1 or more sections If the pulse is simple it can be created using one section only For more complex pulse train the train can be divided to smaller sections and each section designed separately for simplicity Figure 4 34 shows a complex pulse train which was made from five simpler sections and Figure 4 35 shows the design of the fifth section only of the pulse train ArbConnection 4 FA Pulse Composer gt Untitled Ch1 Wes 101 x File Edit View Tools Help D Ge MB En Siow ka Train DI Ng Ka cu GH2 Vertical Scale 10y 1 25W Div Horizontal Scale 80ms Sms Div Figure 4 34 Complete Pulse Train Design GO A aloj x File Edit view Tools Help De NM RER iow section 5 Ng E ou GH Vertical Scale 10 Y 1 25 Div Horizontal Scale 35 2ms 3 52m3 Divw Figure 4 35 Section 5 of the Pulse Train Design 4 61 5061 5062 User Manual e Now that we somewhat understand the terms we use for the pulse design we start with an example how to design the pulse train as shown in Figure 4 34 lf you already have some pulses shown on your pulse composer screen click on New to start from a fresh page Another step before you design your pulse t
300. ting Also note that the digital readout has an autodetect mechanism for the high and low limits You cannot exceed the limits if you are using the dial but only if you use the keypad In case you do the program will not let you download an illegal parameter and you ll be requested to correct your setting The Modulation Panel 2 as shown in Figure 4 11 controls Sweep and AM modulation Description of the controls in this panel is given below The panel is invoked by pressing the MOD2 button on the panels bar The AM function requires an external modulating signal The AM input is common to both channels however modulation for each channel can be turned on and off separately There are two buttons in this group press Channel 1 or Channel 2 to turn on the modulation function for the required channel Watch the limitations of the modulating signal as specified in Appendix A ArbConnection 4 The Control Panels Figure 4 11 The Modulation Panel 2 Sweep The Sweep group contains parameters for controlling sweep options To turn the Sweep function on and off click on the State button in this group The various parameters that control sweep features are described below Parameters Allow adjustment of Sweep Start Stop and Sweep Time You can also place a marker at a position programmed by the Mark parameter To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter tu
301. tion number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier Before you start entering values to this section note that there is only one linear transition required for this section that will start from the last point of the previous section and will connect to the start point of the next section Therefore select the Time Level Points option in the Pulse Train Design Format You are now ready to start programming values Type the section entries as shown in Figure 4 41 4 70 Vertical Scale 10 1 25W Div Horizontal Scale 42 8ms 4 28ms1 ST ku Train DI S ZZ on CH2 MM Pulse Editor Section 4 lt Points gt Section Structure Ip Pulse Train Design Format Index Leva esos SE DC Intervals 2 4 2 4 8 4 8 Time Level Points beh Append Insert Delete Delete All Undo r Section Properties Design Units Y ms Section Start 38 ms Repeat 1 Duration x R 48 ms Figure 4 41 Building Section 4 of the Pulse Example Pulse Example Section 5 File Edit View ArbConnection 4 The fourth pulse section is complete We are ready now to start building the fifth and final section of the pulse as shown in Figure 4 34 Point and click on the Edit command and select the Append Section option A new section number will appear and will show empty next to the section identifier Note that there are fast transitions require
302. tion on the Mixed sequence advance mode is given later 0 flags continuous 1 flags stepped Assuming that you already downloaded waveforms created and downloaded sequence table you can proceed now with the following description how to set the 5062 to output sequenced waveforms Refer to Figure 3 19 and use the following description to learn how to output sequenced waveforms and how to program sequence parameters To select Sequenced waveforms as the output waveform type press Waveforms then Sequenced The screen as shown in Figure 3 19 will display and the output will already generate arbitrary waveforms Note the channel you are currently program and make sure the icon at the upper right corner agrees with your required programming sequence SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 10 000 000 8MS s e 4 MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM OFF FUNC SEQ TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 d i toa z RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE Coy Coy A son Figure 3 19 Sequence Parameters Use the following procedure to modify the parameters that are associated with the Sequenced waveforms function 1 Press the soft key next to the required parameter to display the Using the Instrument Generating Sequenced Waveforms edit field 2 Punch in the value using the numeric keypad Be careful not to exceed parameter limits while you key the numbers 3 Select and press a suffix 4 Press Enter to lock in
303. tive channel and more The Toolbar is shown in Figure 4 33 The icons from left to right operate the following functions New waveform Open an existing waveform file Save pulse train Save pulse train As Print the screen and open the pulse editor dialog box Other icons select the current view on the screen shows channel 1 and channel 2 waveforms clear the memory and download the displayed pulse train to the active channel Dea Creating Pulses 4 60 Current Ile View ku Train D I ae rd CH1 CH2 Figure 4 33 The Pulse Composer Toolbar Icons As was mentioned above creating pulses with the pulse editor is simple and intuitive just as you would draw the pulse on a piece of paper The pulse editor then processes the information determines the appropriate mode and converts to waveform coordinates for downloading to the instrument for it to generate the required pulse shape There are a number of terms that will be used throughout the following description Make yourself familiar with these terms before you proceed with actual design of your pulse Pulse Editor The Pulse Editor is the prime tool for creating pulses To invoke the pulse editor point and click on the pulse editor icon on the pulse composer toolbar You can also invoke the editor by clicking on the Section Number icon as will be shown later in this description The pulse editor dialog box is shown in Figure 4 31 Pulse Train The Pulse Train iden
304. to Channel 2 Model 1071 is a single channel Arbitrary Waveform Generator Model 5062 is a dual channel Arbitrary Waveform Generator It is a high performance waveform generator that combines two separate and powerful channels in one small package Supplied free with the instrument is ArbConnection software which is used for controlling the 5062 and for generating editing and downloading waveforms from a remote computer The following highlights the 5062 and ArbConnection features e Dual output configuration with Independent waveform control e Tight phase offset control between channels 1 point resolution e 14 bit vertical resolution e Nearly 19 bit offset resolution e 1 Meg memory depth for each channel e Ultra fast waveform downloads using DMA e 50MS s sample clock frequency e 50MHZ rear panel sinewave output e 1 ppm clock stability e Extremely low phase noise carrier e External amplitude modulation e Sample clock modulation FSK ramped FSK sweep FM e Trigger start phase control and breakpoints e Built in standard waveforms e Separate sequence generators for each channel e Multiple instrument synchronization with tight phase control e GPIB USB and Ethernet interfaces 5061 5062 User Manual 1 4 BASE MODE Pal E E 1 0 a ArbConnection Feature Highlights Mal Glnrur one DODa ODO JOA O0OB Se ogogo Ke MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM COFF FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1
305. to 25kHz We ll monitor the FSK modulation from the front panel outputs then compare the results to the rear panel sine output connector Before we start with our 5062 setting we must know the length of the arbitrary segment that well use To simplify matters let s download a 1000 points triangular waveform to the segment 1 You can use Tabor Electronics for this purpose Information how to create and download waveforms to the arbitrary memory is given in Chapter 4 From this point it is easy to compute the frequency and the sample clocks that we need for the above example We want the carrier frequency to be 10kHz Bearing in mind that the output frequency is equal to the sample clock frequency divided by the number of points the sample clock must be programmed to be 10MS s 10M 1000 10kHz Using the same method the sample clock for the shift frequency is 25MS s 25M 1000 25kHz Now that we have both frequency values for the carrier and the shifted sample clock we can go directly to front panel programming 1 Press TOP soft key and press the following soft keys sequence Waveforms gt gt Modulated gt gt Modulation Type FSK Make sure the FSK Type shown in this display is Hop and the Carrier shows Arb If the carrier waveform is showing Std backup to the Top menu and select the Arbitrary waveform option 2 Press Hop Sample Clk soft key and program the hop value to 25Ms s Press Enter to lock in the new value 3 Press
306. ts 1023 Min 8192 fi Auto Defaut Equation Amplitude p Remove Store Browse Operands Cancel Jamp sin 1 O oma p p f 0 3 y OK D 255 511 767 1023 Prints Figure 3 16 The Wave Composer Tool for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3 23 5061 5062 User Manual What Are Arbitrary Waveforms Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 3 24 Arbitrary waveforms are generated from digital data points which are stored in a working memory The working memory is connected to a digital to analog converter DAC and a sample clock generator is clocking the data points one at a time to the output circuit In slow motion the output generates a waveform that resembles the look of a staircase In reality the DAC is generating amplitude hops that depend on bit arrangement and sample clock speed The working memory has two major properties vertical resolution and memory depth Vertical Resolution This term defines the precision along the vertical axis of which data points can be placed and generated by the DAC The 5062 is using 14 bit DAC s to generate arbitrary waveforms Converting 14 bits to precision shows that each data point can be placed along the vertical axis with a precision of 1 16 384 Memory Depth Defines how many data points can be stored for a single waveform cycle The 5062 has 1M waveform memory capacity Having such large memory capacity is an advantage Modern applications in the tel
307. ts the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt N_cycles gt sets the number of zero crossing Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt N_cycle gt 4 to 100 APPLy SINC Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt N_cycle gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 10 5 18 Remote Programming Reference SOURce Subsystem APPLy EXPonential lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output exponential waveform along with its associated parameters lt freq gt sets the output frequency in units of hertz e lt ampl gt sets the output amplitude in units of volts e lt offs gt sets the output offset in units of volts e lt exp gt sets the exponent value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt freq gt 100e 6 to 25e6 lt ampl gt 10e 3 to 10 lt offs gt 4 5 to 4 5 lt exp gt 20 to 20 APPLy EXPonential Response The 5062 will return lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Default values are 1e6 5 0 1 APPLy GAUSsian lt freq gt lt ampl gt lt offs gt lt exp gt Purpose This command is a high level command that programs the 5062 to output gaussian waveform along with its associated parameters e lt freq
308. tyles Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes CLS ESE 0 0 255 OPC RST SRE 0 0 255 TRG ESE Query only ESR Query only IDN Query only OPC Query only OPT Query only SRE Query only STB Query only 9 5 13 506 1 5062 User Manual SOURce Subsystem Keyword Limit SOURce AM 7 APPLy 7 SINusoid 7 TRIangle 7 SQUare 7 PULSe 7 RAMP 2 SINC 7 EXPonential GAUSsian DC USER PHASe OFFSet EM DATA DEViation FUNCtion MODE SHAPe FREQuency RASTer 7 TRIGger MODE SLOPe FREQuency RASTer SOURce DIVider FSK FREQuency RASTer 7 MODE 2 RAMP SHAPe ROCSillator SOURce SWEep STOP TIME 5 14 This subsystem is used to control output functions shape and parameters frequency amplitude and amplitude modulation and filter type Optional nodes were omitted from these commands Factory defaults after RST are shown in bold typeface Parameter low and high limits are given where applicable Parameter Form OFF ON 0 1 freg gt lt am freg gt lt am freg gt lt am freg gt lt am freg gt lt am freg gt lt am freg gt lt am lt freq gt lt am lt _ampl g
309. u modify the parameter The final value will be locked in as soon as you press Enter If you choose to leave the old value press Cancel to terminate the process and to discard of any change made to this parameter Using the Instrument Selecting a Run Mode PROGRAM e E soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 c os ol ES Arpa Amplitude Selecting a Run Mode _ Segment 10 00 Number REO 259 BASE MODE FUNC ARE TYPE BIT 1 BREAKPOINT 1 O ege a o RUN CONT POSITION SLOPE POSITIVE En co la e e O A A son son SS cH1 4 500 Vpp d MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM COFFI Figure 3 8 Programming Amplitude and Offset The Model 5062 offers four run modes Continuous Triggered Gated and Burst The selected waveform is repeated continuously when the instrument is set to operate in Continuous mode In this mode the 5062 does not require a trigger source to stimulate output cycles The operating mode defaults to continuous after reset Triggered Gated and Burst modes require an external signal to initiate output cycles In some case an internal trigger generator is available to generate the required trigger stimuli without the need to connect to external devices Figure 3 9 show the run mode options Press one of the soft keys in the left to select the required run mode Description of the various run modes and the parameters that are associated with each run mode is given in the following par
310. ue will be in standard scientific format for example 100mHz would be returned as 100E 3 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 1e6 FREQuency RASTer lt sclk gt MINimum MAXimum Purpose This command modifies the sample clock frequency of the arbitrary waveform in units of samples per second S s It has no affect on standard waveforms e lt sclk gt sets the sample clock frequency e lt MINimum gt sets the sample clock frequency to its lowest value e lt MAXimums gt sets the sample clock frequency to its highest value Parameter type Numeric Parameter range lt sclk gt 100e 3 to 50e6 FREQuency RASTer Response and default The 5062 will return the present sample clock frequency value The returned value will be in standard scientific format for example 50MHz would be returned as 50e6 positive numbers are unsigned Default value is 10e6 FREQuency RASTer SOURce EXTernal INTernal Purpose This command selects the source of the sample clock generator This command affects both the standard and the arbitrary waveforms lt EXTernal gt selects an external source 5 25 5061 5062 User Manual e lt INTernal gt selects the internal source Parameter type Discrete FREQuency RASTer SOURce Response and default The 5062 will return EXT if an external source is selected or INT if the internal source is selected Default value is INT FREQuency RASTer DIVider lt divider gt Purpose The sample clock
311. up There are two other sub groups in the FSK block Mode and Parameters The various controls in the FSK group are described below 4 23 5061 5062 User Manual Mode Parameters The Modulation Panel 2 AM 4 24 The Mode group lets you select between two shift options Hop and Ramped In hop mode the sample clock hops to the shift frequency without delays In ramped mode the sample clock ramps to the shift frequency at a rate determined by the Ramp Time parameter Click on the option you prefer to select between hop and ramped modes Allow adjustment of Ramp Time carrier sample clock frequency SCLK and shifted sample clock frequency SCLK2 parameters To access the required parameter click on the button below parameters sub group until the LED next to the required parameter turns on The value that is associated with the lit LED is displayed on the digital display You can use the dial keyboard or the 1 H keys to adjust the readout to the required setting After you modify the reading press Execute to update the 5062 with the new reading e Note Normal color of the digital reading is dark blue If you modify the reading the color changes to a lighter shade of blue indicating that the 5062 has not been updated yet with the new parameter Pressing Execute will update the instrument and will restore the color of the digital readout to dark blue indicating that the displayed value is the same as the generator set
312. ure 3 22 Selecting a modulated Waveform 3 FM Modulation Frequency modulation is the most common modulation scheme 3 34 used in telecommunications In this mode the sample clock frequency is modulated and placed at the rear panel sine output FM modulation is also available from the front panel outputs except the frequency must be computed from the sample clock and the number of points that generate the output waveform Confusing Yes a bit but some examples below will remove your confusion When you select the FM modulation the parameters as shown in Figure 3 23 and described in the following paragraphs will be available for modification Modulation Shape Defines the shape and type of the modulating waveform Although there are 5 options shown in the menu there is a significant difference between the first four Sine Triangle Square and Ramp and the last option Arbitrary The two types are described below Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms PROGRAM ON OFF GEA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 cH2 output syn Modulation SS Type emmmer Modulation Square Shape Ramp LA Lei Arbitrary Sample Clk o 000 0 s Q Deviation PEE oc 8 00 s or MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG BASE MODE FUNC MOD TYPE BIT C CEA LU RUN CONT POSITION o EN Ea En ey PA te f A A F A son son Figure 3 23 FM Modulation Parameters 1 Sine Triangle Square and Ramp are built in wavefo
313. ure which of the interfaces is selected compare the following icons to what you have on the screen Designates GPIB interface is selected and active GPIB configuration is required to communicate with your PC Designates USB interface is selected and active First connection requires USB configuration and software driver installation to communicate with your PC Designates LAN interface is selected and active LAN configuration is required to communicate with your PC PROGRAM ON OFF GRA soms s WAVEFORM GENERATOR WW5062 oo foureur sync Select Interface LAN 10 100 BASE MODE FUNC emp TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 e e o RUN CONT POSITION o SLOPE POSITIVE E co a d d d d q Y b A A son son GPIB Configuration OOO occ DOE OGPIB_ USB LAN10 100 NOTE ie Enter to select the active CJ a interface EE Cen se UA o MENU LOCAL MAN TRIG SYNC OUT ARM COFF Figure 2 1 Selecting a Remote interface GPIB configuration requires an address setting only If you intend to use more than one instrument on the bus you have to make sure each device has a unique address setting GPIB address is programmed from the front panel Utility menu as shown in Figure 2 2 To access this screen press the TOP menu button then select the Utility soft key and scroll down with the dial to the Remote Setup option and press the Enter key The GPIB soft key will update the display with the GPIB address parameter T
314. us Register ESR Reading the response to the OPC query has the advantage of removing the complication of dealing with service requests and multiple polls to the instrument However both the system bus and the controller handshake are in a temporary hold off state while the The SCPI Status Registers Remote Programming Reference IEEE STD 488 2 Common Commands and Queries controller is waiting to read the OPC query response OPT Returns the value 0 for a 5062 with no options RST Resets the generator to its default state Default values are listed in Table 4 1 SRE lt enable_value gt Enables bits in the Status Byte enable register SRE Query the Status Byte enable register The generator returns a decimal value in the range of O to 63 or 128 to 191 since bit 6 RSQ cannot be set The binary weighted sum of the number represents the value of the bits of the Service Request enable register STB Query the Status Byte summary register The STB command is similar to a serial poll but is processed like any other instrument command The STB command returns the same result as a serial poll but the request service bit bit 6 is not cleared if a serial poll has occurred TRG Triggers the generator from the remote interface This command effects the generator if it is first placed in the Trigger or Burst mode of operation and the trigger source is set to BUS WAI Wait for all pending operat
315. veform length Ramped FSK is the same as the FSK function except the output is ramped instead of switched to the shift frequency Ramp time is programmable with 3 digits from 100us to 1 second The FM function modulates the 5062 sample clock frequency You can frequency modulate the output either with built in waveforms or download complex waveforms to the modulation memory Using the latest DDS technology the modulation is wide band and extremely linear FM can be used in continuous triggered and gated modes The 5062 can generate two types of frequency modulation 1 Standard and 2 Arbitrary In standard mode the modulating waveform is selected from a built in library of 4 standard waveforms sine triangle square and ramped wave shapes In arbitrary mode the modulating signal is downloaded to the modulation waveform memory There are 20 000 points allocated specifically for the arbitrary memory that is used for arbitrary frequency modulation 5061 5062 User Manual Output Type Standard Fixed Waveforms Arbitrary User Waveforms Sequenced Waveforms The 5062 can output three types of waveforms standard Fixed arbitrary User and sequenced waveforms Different waveform types may be assigned to each channel however the both channels must share the same output type Description of the various output types that the instrument can generate is given below The 5062 must pre load its memory before it can generate wavefor
316. viation range At the beginning of this example we computed and showed that the 5062 is using 32 points to generate this waveform Note that the deviation range is given on sample per second and use the following relationship to compute the number for the deviation range Deviation Range 100kHz x 32 3 2MS After you complete updating the above field the FM Composer will have the following coordinates The Y axis shows the frequency deviation range The center line shows 32MS and the high and low limits are 65 6MS and 62 4MS respectively The X axis shows the length of the arbitrary modulating waveform The length is in points In our example the first point is 0 and the last is 9999 total of 10 000 points 6 Now that you have the Y and X parameters set you can generate the shape of the modulating waveform Tabor Electronics has a library of standard waveform that include Sine Triangle Square Exponential Pulse and Random Noise Using the Instrument Generating Modulated Waveforms waveforms You can use one of these waveforms or import coordinates from an external file to generate more complex waveforms Well use a simple sine waveform for this example From the Waves menu select the Sine Leave the parameters in the Sine dialog box as is and press OK 7 The last step is to download the modulating waveform to the 5062 Press the download button to send the modulating waveform to the instrument DIE 10000 D
317. ware for TABOR WW5062 USB Waveform Generator If your hardware came with an installation CD lt gt or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do O Install the software automatically Recommended Click Next to continue Figure 2 4 Found New Hardware Wizard Immediately thereafter the Found New Hardware Wizard will open as shown in Figure 2 4 Select the Install from a list or specific Location option and click on next At this time insert the installation CD into your CD driver If you know the logical letter for your CD drive type in the information in the path field If you are not sure where this driver is click on the Browse button and look for the path Check the appropriate controls as shown in Figure 2 5 and then click on Next To complete the process press on Finish as shown in Figure 2 6 Configuring the Instrument y Selecting a Remote interface Found New Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options e Y Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driver found will be installed C Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search D Drivers O Don t search will choose the driver to install Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that the driver
318. waveform screen will show a clear display Options The view options command opens the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 32 Use this dialog box to fine tune the pulse composer to the way it should deal with operational modes and the waveform memory Options information options is given later in this chapter Pulse Editor Options 3 xj r Mode of Operation m Memory Management Freely Select Mode of Operation C Do not Dverride Loaded Segments z Allow Pulse Design with no Limitation Force Puise Train to Single Segment Arbitrary Waveform Mode j Force Pulse Sections to Mate Segments Sequenced waveform Model r Pulse Transition Management Allow System Control Design Units ow System Contro Time units Ims el Level Units v y Lirhit increments 200 coa Figure 4 32 The Pulse Editor Options Tools Commands The Tools commands let you download pulse trains to either channel 1 or channel 2 You can also clear the entire waveform memory using the Clear memory command ei Note The Clear Memory command affects the entire waveform memory of the 5062 and therefore be careful not to erase memory segments that you ll need to use with the 4 59 5061 5062 User Manual arbitrary function The Pulse Composer The toolbar contains icons for editing the waveform screen icons Toolbar for saving and loading waveforms fields for selecting an ac
319. ways to program the Model 5062 the first being low level programming of each individual parameter using SCPI commands The second alternative is to use ArbConnection for high level programming ArbConnection is a software package supplied with the 5062 that simulates a mechanical front panel It has all the necessary push buttons displays and dials to operate the instrument as if you were using it on the bench The third alternative is using application specific drivers such LabVIEW The instrument generates its sample clock from a DDS circuit direct digital synthesis The DDS circuit enables frequency agility through the complete frequency range of the 5062 Having such an enormous range opens the door for a wide range of applications such as wide band sweep FSK and frequency modulation The 5062 can generate FSK Ramped FSK and Linear or Logarithmic sweep The instrument can also frequency modulate its carrier using one of its built in waveforms or with any user defined modulating signal which can be downloaded using the FM wave composer There are applications requiring more than 2 synchronized channels at time even 10 channels Synchronization between completely independent free running instruments is not an easy task Besides distribution of the sample clock to all instruments each instrument has to be told when to start generating waveforms so that all start at the same point and with the same phase Triggering multiple instrument
320. with fast transitions when combined with parabolic expressions have tendencies to generate even larger transitions Therefore make sure you omit such sections of the waveform when you use this operation Filter The Filter used with this command is moving average This is done by recalculating each point as an average of symmetrical number of adjacent points When you select the Filter command a dialog box pops up letting you program the filter spacing in number of adjacent points You can filter the entire waveform or you may chose to filter a segment of the waveform by placing the anchors as boundaries on the left and right of the segment Invert The Invert command lets you invert the entire waveforms or marked segments of waveforms The waveform is inverted about the 0 point axis Trim Left The trim left command lets you trim waveforms to the left of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the left anchor was not moved from its original left position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the left anchor point becomes the first point of the waveform 4 33 5061 5062 User Manual 4 34 View Commands Trim Right The trim right command lets you trim waveforms to the right of the anchor point This command is grayed out if the right anchor was not moved from its original right position The waveform is trimmed and the point at the right anchor point becomes the last point of the waveform Unmark The unmark com
321. xamples for these factors are variation in cable length and quality as well as non symmetrical end termination Therefore if you want to eliminate skew between channels you have to use exactly the same cable type the same cable length and the same termination on both channels There are times however that you do need to offset phase between channels In that case the 5062 lets you adjust phase offset variations with resolution of one point When you do just keep in mind that the initial skew will escort your programmed Using the Instrument Adjusting Phase Offset Between Channels phase offset throughout the entire phase offset range Notice that phase offset resolution is given in points not degrees This is because the 5062 can generate arbitrary waveforms that you download from an external application After you download waveforms there is no way for the instrument to determine phase because all it has is just number of points and no further knowledge of the shape of your waveform If you insist you can convert points to degrees on your waveform from the following equation Phase in Phase point x 360 number of waveform points If you are using standard waveforms you can determine the number of points that the 5062 is using from the standard waveform Note the Freq and the SCLK values The number of points is derived from the following relationship Number of Waveform Points SCLK Freq Knowing the number of poi
322. y STOP 20e6 100e 3 50 6 STATEe OFF ON TIME 1e 3 1e 3 1000 DIRection UP DOWN SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic TRIGger CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed MODE CONTinuous TRIGgered GATed SLOPe POSitive NEGative MARKer 32e6 100e 3 50 6 AM STATe OFF ON TRACe DATA lt arbitrary_block gt DEFine 15152048 16 16 1M Even number divisible by 4 DELete NAME 1 1 2048 ALL SELect 1 1 2048 SEGMent DATA lt binary_block gt SEQuence DATA lt binary_block gt ADVance AUTOmatic STEP SINGle MIXed SOURce EXTernal INTernal DEFine 1 1 2048 1 1 2048 1 1 1E6 0 0 1 Step segment repeat advance mode DELete ALL 9 5061 5062 User Manual Table 5 1 Model 5062 SCPI Commands List Summary continued Keyword Parameter Form Default in Bold Notes INITiate IMMediately CONTinuous ON OFF TRIGger BURSt STATe OFF ON COUNt 1 1 1E6 SOURce ADVance EXTernal INTernal GATE STATe OFF ON SLOPe POSitive NEGative TlMer 1e3 10e 3 2e6 In Hz units PHASe 0 0 1M 4 point increments IMMediate ARM STATe OFF ON SLOPe STARt POSitive NEGative BREakpoint POSition 0 0 1M 4 point increments DE Get SYSTem ERRor Query only VERSion Query only 1999 0 5 12 Remote Programming Reference SCPI Syntax and S
323. y reported through the Message Available bit bit 4 Bits in the summary register are not latched Clearing an event register will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte summary register Description of the various bits within the Status Byte summary register is given in the following Bit 0 Decimal value 1 Not used always set to 0 Bit 1 Decimal value 2 Not used always set to 0 Bit 2 Decimal value 4 Not used always set to 0 Bit 3 Decimal value 8 Not used always set to 0 Bit 4 Decimal value 16 Message Available Queue Summary Message MAV The state of this bit indicates whether or not the output queue is empty The MAV summary message is true when the output queue is not empty This message is used to synchronize information exchange with the controller The controller can for example send a query command to the device and then wait for MAV to become true If an application program begins a read operation of the output queue without first checking for MAV all system bus activity is held up until the device responds Bit 5 Decimal value 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message This bit indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled ESB events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Standard Event Status Register Bit 6 Decimal value 64 Master Summary Status MSS Request Service RQS Bit This bit indicates if the device has at least one condition to request service The
324. z Arbitrary waveform sample clock frequency is measured in units of S s samples per second The frequency of a given arbitrary waveform at the output connector is dependant on sample clock frequency the number of data points and other specific waveform definitions The frequency of the output waveform will change only if a standard waveform is generated First select a standard waveform as described earlier and then proceed with frequency modification Observe Figure 3 5 and modify frequency using the following procedure The index numbers in Figure 3 5 correspond to the procedure steps in the following description 1 Press the Frequency soft key to select the frequency parameter 2 Use the numeric keypad to program the new frequency value 3 Press M k x1 or m to terminate the modification process Alternately you can modify the frequency value with the dial and arrow keys but then the termination of the process is by pressing Enter only MENU Wave Shape WY Di SOMS s WAVEFORM GENERATOR wws062 Frequency Zeg a Upp S a at de Amplitude BASE MODE SYNC OUT ARM OFF H FUNC STD TYPE BIT BREAKPOINT 1 RUN CONT POSITION 6 SLOPE POSITIVE P 0 MENU LOCAL Using the Instrument Changing the Sample Clock Frequency PROGRAM CHI cH MAN TRIG 3 Changing the Sample Clock Frequency GE dam d RK Figure 3 5 Modifying Output Frequency B Note If you use the dial o
325. zed The 5062 has a special master slave synchronization feature that allows connection of multiple instruments in a daisy chain Not only that the channels are derived from the same master sample clock source but other signals are distributed from the master instrument which tightly control start phase and jitter Connecting multiple instruments in master slave configuration is extremely easy All you need is two types of cables the first being a standard BNC to BNC coax cable to feed the sample clock output and a 9 pin to 9 pin cable to feed the master to slave or slave to slave controls The master slave cable is supplied with your instrument however the BNC cable you can get from any store Figure 3 29 shows the connection between master and slave instruments Additional slave units can be daisy chained in a similar way What you have to remember is that SCLK OUT feeds an adjacent SCLK IN Also always have the last slave unit in the chain terminated with the special 9 pin terminator A MASTER SLAVE CABLE LAST SLAVE TERMINATOR Figure 3 29 Wiring Diagram Master to Slave Hard wiring the instruments from the back is not enough You now have to set up the first instrument in the chain as master and the other instruments as slaves Refer to Fi

Tabor Electronics Ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents